JP6741702B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are changed based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state when the result of the game is a special result.

A variable display device whose display contents can be changed, and a variable display game with a plurality of identification symbols is executed on the variable display device based on the fact that a game ball is won in a start winning opening provided in the game area, and the variation A game machine comprising: a control unit that performs control for generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the display result of the display game becomes a predetermined special result mode, wherein the control unit is the Based on the starting winning information stored in the starting winning storing means and the starting winning storing means for storing the starting winning information that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening Variable display game execution control means for executing the variable display game, and the variable display game execution control means temporarily stops in a result mode other than the special result mode in the middle of the variable display game, and then displays the variable display again. There is known a gaming machine capable of setting a pseudo continuous variation display mode in which revariation display for starting is repeated one or more times (see, for example, Patent Document 1). That is, there is known a gaming machine capable of executing a re-variation effect of re-variably displaying the identification symbol in the middle of the variable display game.

JP, 2014-208162, A

With the conventional game machines, it has not been possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of re-variation production.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of re-variation production.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game that changes a plurality of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and can generate a special game state when the result of the game is a special result,
The period from the start to the end of the game is
A first section which is a section before the reach state is formed,
A second section which is a section after the reach state is formed,
And a third section which is a section after the reach state is formed and which is a section after the second section ,
In each of the first section and the second section , it is possible to execute a re-fluctuation effect that re-fluctates after temporarily suspending a part of the plurality of identification information,
Between districts where the re-variation effect of the first section and the second section is Ru is executed, the variation mode of the provisional stop and not the identification information when re-variation effect is executed, became among those compartment Unlike the variation of identification information immediately after,
In the third section, it is possible to execute a re-fluctuation effect that re-fluctates after temporarily stopping all of the plurality of pieces of identification information,
Before and after the temporary stop in the first section, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the special result,
The expectation degree suggested by the suggestive effect performed after the temporary stop is equal to the expectation degree suggested by the suggestive effect performed before the temporary stop or the suggestive effect suggested before the temporary stop is suggested. It is characterized by higher than expectations.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of re-variation production.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart explaining output processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flow chart explaining winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing. It is a flow chart explaining probability set value confirmation processing. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process. (A) is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation start process, (b) is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure fluctuation process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart for explaining the universal figure game process. It is a flow chart explaining ordinary processing usually. It is a flow chart explaining processing during general figure change. It is a flow chart explaining processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing in the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining received command analysis processing. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of a probability set value. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 1st modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fixed condition monitoring process in a 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flow chart explaining shift judgment processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability set value in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining a schematic structure of a setting means and a game control device in the 5th modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability set value confirmation processing in the 6th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 7th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the probability set value change processing in the 7th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the probability set value change processing in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in a 9th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the probability set value confirmation processing in the 10th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting|reporting aspect in an 11th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare/interval processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening opening process. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit ending process. (A) is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 1, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 2. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit. It is a flow chart explaining a small hit operation shift setting process. It is a flow chart explaining small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit ending process. It is a figure explaining over-prize notification production. It is a figure explaining over-prize notification production. It is a figure explaining over-prize notification production. It is a figure explaining over-prize notification production. It is a figure explaining over-prize notification production. It is the figure which explains the winning number information production. It is the figure which explains the winning number information production. It is the figure which explains the winning number information production. It is the figure which explains the winning number information production. It is the figure which explains the winning number information production. It is the figure which explains the winning number information production. It is the figure which explains the winning number information production. It is a figure explaining a payout amount notification effect. It is a figure explaining a payout amount notification effect. It is a figure explaining a payout amount notification effect. It is a flow chart explaining fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining the winning number counter update processing. It is a figure explaining the 1st acquisition payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining the 1st acquisition payout number notification production. It is a flow chart explaining update processing of a high probability variation frequency. It is a figure explaining the 2nd acquisition payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining the 2nd acquisition payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining re-variation production. It is a figure explaining re-variation production. It is a figure explaining re-variation production. It is a figure explaining re-variation production. It is a figure explaining re-variation production. It is a figure explaining re-variation production.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable/closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a lamp, an LED, etc. are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, the LED, etc., an abnormality notification color (for example, red color). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b are used to notify the content of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for alerting|reporting abnormalities in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, there are an upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower plate (receiving plate) 23 that stores the game balls that have been paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation handle 24 of the ball striking device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21, there is provided an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation handle 24 to cause the ball launch device to direct the gaming balls supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by the player operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect of the player's operation intervening is displayed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is configured by being surrounded by a resin side case 33 and a guide rail 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 having a display device 41 in the substantial center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent the game ball from jumping in from the peripheral game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to the game such as a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect are displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left part and the right part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 is provided, which is a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special figure variation display game by operating movable effect members. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, in the lower left part of the center case 40, a sub-display for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variable display game separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 and for displaying the starting memory number An information display device 90 is provided.

The sub-information display device 90 is a first light emitting section that forms a sub-game display section that displays a fourth symbol that executes the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game. The second sub configured by the sub game display unit 91 and a single light emitting unit that forms a sub game display unit that displays the fourth symbol that executes the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the second special figure variable display game. And a game display unit 92. Furthermore, the first special display variable display game, which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game by the two light emitting units, and the second special figure variable display game, which is the number of the first starting memories, and the two light emitting units, are executed. A second sub-display section 94 showing the number of second starting memories, which is the right to perform.

In the first sub game display section 91 and the second sub game display section 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variable display game is being variably displayed and a display indicating the result are turned off, blinking, and lit of the light emitting section. Can be displayed. Further, the first sub-display section 93 and the second sub-display section 94 indicate the numbers of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) and the second start memory (special figure 2 hold), respectively, by turning off the two light emitting parts. It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied by displaying the fourth symbol on the display device 41, and the display area is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board production device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operating the board production device 44. ..

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol starting gate 34 (general figure starting gate, starting area, inflow area) for giving a starting condition of the figure varying display game. The game ball that has won the universal figure starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the universal figure starting gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) for providing a start condition of the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, directly below the starting winning opening 36, a normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) for providing a start condition of the second special figure variation display game is provided.
The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which is opened by turning in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball easily flows in. The movable member 37b is normally It holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the universal electric prize solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device is used to open the game ball easily into the regular variation winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be allowed to win even in the closed state, and in the closed state, the player may win the prize rather than the open state.
Further, below the normal variation winning device 37, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that can be opened by pivoting the upper end side in the direction of falling toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The state where the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) is changed to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38 includes, for example, a special winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening/closing door 38c driven by a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and is in a special game state or a small hit game. During the state, by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the big winning opening and give the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). Has become. A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is arranged inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. .. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two special winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening is detected by any of the special winning opening switches 38a. By thus providing a plurality of special winning opening switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flown into the special winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. ing. Then, the player can aim the winning at the starting winning opening 36 by adjusting the launching force to shoot the game ball to the left game area (so-called left hit), and shoot the game ball to the right game area (so-called). By hitting (right-handed), it is possible to aim for winning at the universal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game sphere is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since at least the front surface material of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game sphere passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, A game ball that passes through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball that flows down in the right-side game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure changing display game, the second special figure changing display game, and the normal figure starting gate 34, which are special figure changing display games, are displayed. A collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game triggered by winning and various information is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit (special figure 1 indicator) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure variation display game including a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The second special figure fluctuation display section (special figure 2 display) 52 for the variable display game, the fluctuation display section (general figure display) 53 for the general figure variable display game composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp And a storage display unit 54, 55, 56 for informing the number of starting memories of each variable display game.
In addition, the collective display device 50, a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state display unit, right-handed informing unit) 57, which informs that a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game, a time saving When a state occurs, a second gaming state display section (second gaming state indicator, time saving state informing section) 58 that lights up to inform the occurrence of a time saving state, a probability state of big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state. A third game state display unit (third game state display unit, probability state display unit) 59 that indicates that it has become, a round display unit 60 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning device 38) Is provided.
Note that the collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display device) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is displayed at the center while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 msec, for example. In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also driven to blink to change. It is configured to display that it is inside.
When the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of the off, and when the result of the game is “hit”, the off result mode (special result mode) is off. A game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, numbers or symbols) other than the result mode.

The public figure display 53 blinks a lamp during the change to indicate that the change is occurring, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the result of the game. In addition, the universal figure holding indicator 56 displays the number of starting memories (=holding number) of the universal figure starting gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the universal figure indicator 53, by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number=holding number) out of the number of winning balls into the starting winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 indicator 51, using a plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off, blinking, and turning on. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the start memory number (=holding number) of the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37), which is the variation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, turns off a plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking or lighting.

The first gaming state display unit (right hitting notification unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp when the left hitting is more advantageous to the player than the right hitting (normal hitting). In the state, when the right hitting is more advantageous to the player than the left hitting (a right hitting), the lamp is turned on.

The second gaming state display unit (time saving state notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and in a normal gaming state where the time saving state does not occur (when the variable time reduction function is not activated), the lamp is turned off. If the time saving condition occurs (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), turn on the lamp.

The third gaming state display section (probability state display section) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and when the power state of the gaming machine 10 is a low probability state (normal probability state), the lamp is turned off. Then, when the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probability change state) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in effect, the lamp is turned off, and in the special game state, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn it on. The round display section may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having the same, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU section 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and supplies an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock of a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generation. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic parts such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

The power supply device 400 has a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC 32V from an AC power supply of 24V, and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V or DC 5V from a voltage of DC 32V. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that informs the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate substrates or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (in particular, the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a backup storage means capable of holding the stored data even when the power is off. When the power is restored, the control can be restarted based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous for the player (special gaming state), some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed, and have already been derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state where the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of the left, middle, and right (for example, the same The state that has become the identification information (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a reach effect with a different possibility of deriving the special result mode (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state is generated is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit, as compared with the case where the reach state is not generated.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). Random pattern generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the reach and the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general figure variable display game And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A causes the special figure variation display game to have a game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state (time saving operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current game state, the number of stored memories, and the like, and selects any one variation pattern table from the plurality of variation pattern tables. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit to drive a payout ball according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the universal starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I/F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut to float. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above, and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a and the special winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. .. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 is a set value change function which is a detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting from a plurality of probability set values to which a probability value which is a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that is the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position. When the setting key switch 152 is turned to the second position, it is turned on, and when it is not turned to the second position. If there is, it is turned off.

The set value change switch 151 detects an operation of a set value change button that is a second operation unit of the operation units. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and turned off when the set value change button is not pressed.

By operating these operation parts, you can select the probability setting value to which the probability value that will be a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value can be played in the game. It is being used. Here, six probability setting values, setting 1 to setting 6, are prepared. The probability value assigned to each probability setting value is 1/320 in setting 1, 1/310 in setting 2, 1/300 in setting 3, 1/290 in setting 4, 1/280 in setting 5, and 6/80 in setting 6. It is set to 1/270. This probability value is a probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on to set the probability setting value. Can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value changing button in this probability setting value changing state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

In addition, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operating unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or when the setting key of the setting key operating unit is turned on after turning on the power of the gaming machine. When turned to the second position, the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153, but the probability setting value confirmation mode cannot be changed.

The probability setting value display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and is configured to display the probability setting value by numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode can be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or the probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or more LEDs. Further, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability setting value information may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio. In this case, while operating the probability setting value (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), the probability setting value information is displayed, and otherwise the calculated base value and character ratio Give priority to the display.

In the present embodiment, the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, etc. are provided in the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 uses the probability value used in the lottery of the special figure variation display game. The probability setting value to which is assigned is configured as a setting unit that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit. The function of this setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, the operation signals of the set value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability set value in the game control device 100, or on the setting sub-board side. The probability setting value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value changing switch 151 or the setting key switch 152, and the determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (enable) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when detecting that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24) Based signal), an out ball detection switch signal (a signal based on detection by an out switch that detects all the game balls that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished playing), and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided with a first input port 122.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-shooting test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set in the ports of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the test is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-shooting test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a special variable winning device 38 (a special winning opening solenoid) 38b and a movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 a solenoid (genuine solenoid) 37c. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the opening/closing data. The second output port 134 also outputs the display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio.

Also, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game shop, for example, and information about the gaming machine 10 can be displayed. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 displaying the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the output unit 130 receives a opening/closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the universal solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to generate and output a solenoid drive signal, which is a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , A second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. A fifth driver 138e for receiving the display data output from the second output port 134 and displaying it on the status display device 160 is provided.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The production control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a storage content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of the solenoid, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) To receive. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 and the sub information display device 90 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the glass frame 15, a game board 30 (including the center case 40) A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the provided board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. It should be noted that the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a production device), and the movable production member that operates is a frame that forms a movable production device that produces a game including a special figure variation display game. A rendering device may be provided and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame rendering device may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. That detects the ON/OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided to detect a signal and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a direct-current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I/F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker. Is configured to. Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signals) to put them in a reset state. In addition, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) toward a game area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The winning prize 36, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38, or it flows into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When the game balls are won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 38, the number of award balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening that has won the payout control device 200 ( From the payout unit controlled by (see FIG. 3), the glass plate 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

In the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided, and the game area 32 is provided. When the game ball hit in passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of memory for starting normal figure starting is the upper limit number (for example, 4) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the starting gate for normal figure 34. If less than), the number of ordinary figure starting memory is added (+1) and one ordinary figure starting memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of stored universal figure starting prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. Further, in the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for determination of hit (random number value for determination) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a general figure starting memory and the general figure variable display game can be started, that is, the general figure variable display game is not being executed, the general figure variable display game hits and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the hit judgment random number value stored in the most commonly stored figure start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/miss of the figure change display game. Then, the process of starting the universal figure variation display game is performed. When the random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time on the public figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general figure variable display game. After performing the universal figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed in the order, the process of displaying the universal figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the universal figure display 53 is configured by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are normally used as the identification information, which is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped and displayed to display the result. It may be configured.

When the result of the universal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol that forms a special result mode on the universal figure display 53 according to the type of hit While displaying the stop, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to perform the control of opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display a lighting pattern on the public-picture display 53, which is a result mode of the off-going.

The winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory forming the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). In addition to being stored, a second starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37, is stored within a predetermined upper limit (for example, four). Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted random numbers. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first starting memory or the second starting memory. The number of stored starting memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 of the collective display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40 the decorative special figure start memory. Displayed as a display. Further, it is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

When the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game is ready to start, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The generated big hit determination random number value is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set in accordance with the probability setting value, and the processing of determining the hit of the special figure variable display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

When the first special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After performing the special character 1 changing display, the processing for displaying the first special character changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. In the case of executing the second special figure variable display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display device 52 (variable display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, a process of displaying the second special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, characters) corresponding to the special figure variable display game are displayed on the display device 41 (variable display device). A process for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game in which a pattern etc.) is variably displayed is performed. In addition, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 displays the decorative special figure variation display game in which the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit is changed corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) formed by the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display area (first special symbol) and the right variation display area ( 2nd special symbol), in each of the medium variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, after a predetermined time, the symbols that are changing are stopped in order of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area, and stopped in each of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed for the purpose of improving the interest.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, makes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special view 2 display device 52. While displaying the lighting pattern, processing for generating a special gaming state or a small hitting gaming state is performed. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

In the process of generating the special game state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening/closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b, for example, to play in the special winning opening. Performs control that enables the inflow of spheres. Then, until a condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Opening is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high-probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal-probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation Both floating display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, general figure high probability state, second operation state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. Has become. In this short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (typical figure probability) is a high probability (typical figure high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (typical figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the universal figure probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state. That is, the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 is configured to be controlled in one of the first operation state and the second operation state in which winning is easier than in the first operation state. ..

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the figure change display game (the figure change time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the figure stop time for displaying the result of the figure change display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal figure variation display game is a hit result and the normal variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (normal power open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec×1 time), Opening time of the second hit stop design (normal power open time) and number of releases (for example, 1700 msec x 2 times), Open time of the third hit stop design (normal power open time) and number of releases (for example, 1700 msec x) 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the universal figure variation display game, the universal figure stop time, the number of regular electricity open, and the universal electricity open time are appropriately set so that the general figure variation display game and the regular variation prize winning device 37 are controlled to be in a time saving operation state. Alternatively, for example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described universal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure fluctuation time) to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the general figure stop time for displaying the result of the general figure change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec. 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (genuine electric opening time) is set to the normal state (general figure low probability state). It is possible to control such that the second opening time is longer than the one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the normal electric power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure changing display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, four times) of the second opening number. In addition, in the time saving state, the probability that the hit result of the figure variation display game (universal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability in the normal operation state (general figure low probability state, for example, 1/251). The probability (universal figure high probability state, for example, 250/251) can be used.

In the time saving state, the general variation prize winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the short-time state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

The special display 1 display 51 and the special display 2 display 52 may be separate display or the same display, but each special display variation display so as not to be executed independently or at the same time. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display areas for the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decoration special variable display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Further, the gaming machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. In addition, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a starting memory of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is It is designed to be executed (executed with priority). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special figure variation display games.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a, the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished the game is equipped with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) for detecting is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, first, the process of inhibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc. when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step S4. Then, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and the process for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the sub-control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register or the like which is not a validity determination target) which is not a target of a RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

A signal from the set value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 and a signal from the main frame opening detection switch are input to the third input port 124. By reading the state of the input port 124, the state of the set value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 when the power is turned on and the open state of the front frame 12 (main frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes an opening/closing detection means capable of detecting the opened/closed state of the front frame 12. As described above, when the front frame 12 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed Becomes Further, when the power is turned on with the setting value change button being pressed down without the setting key of the setting key operation unit being turned to the second position, the RAM 111C is cleared (initialized). ing. Since the setting key operation unit and the set value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, the front frame 12 must be opened.

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, it is possible to reliably detect the operation of the set value change button. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the lapse of the waiting time, it is necessary to continue to operate the set value changing button from the time when the power is turned on to the lapse of the waiting time. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed at power-on cannot be accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits until the power is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0. Is determined (step S12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, when the waiting time has expired, access is permitted to the RWM (read/write memory) capable of reading and writing such as RAM and EEPROM (step S13). ), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port that is installed in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is judged whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S16). If the value is normal (step S16; Y), the power failure in the RWM It is determined whether the value of the inspection area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and power-off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy determination unit that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit is valid when the power is turned on. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability setting value change state is set (step S21). When the probability setting value changing state is set, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set.

If it is in the probability setting value changing state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the process of initializing the RAM and the probability setting value changing state in which the probability setting value can be changed are performed. Note that it is determined here that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is shut off and the RAM data is normally backed up while the probability setting value is being changed. In this case, the probability setting value is again set. The value is changed. When the probability setting value change state is not set (step S21; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 previously read whether the main body frame (front face frame 12) is open (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, a probability setting value area, an initial value random number area, a variation pattern random area, a game control area, and a status display area are set in order from the beginning. In the area for probability setting values, a probability setting value area for storing information on the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. To be done. This work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value changing state, and an area for storing various flags. In the area for initial value random numbers, big hit symbol initial value random numbers, small hit symbol initial value random numbers, hit initial value random numbers, and hit symbol initial value random numbers that are updated at any time are stored. Further, the variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 which are updated at any time are stored in the variable pattern random number area. In the game control area, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored and a stack area are set. In addition, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying a base value, a character ratio, etc., and a stack area are set in the work area for status display.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished playing, and the number of payouts based on winning in the prize area. The information required to display the base value includes, for example, information regarding the number of game balls detected by the out switch and information regarding the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the ratio of the accessory character is in the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending) out of the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole from turning on the game machine 10 to the present. It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by each character) obtained by winning the special winning prize in (excluding inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. The information includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (acquired ball count by role goods).

The RAM clear start address 2 is the start address of the area for the initial value random number, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the The area for game control will be cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the variable pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. Further, a RAM clear start address 1 which will be described later is a start address of the area for the probability setting value, and the RAM is cleared while this address is set, whereby the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are set. The area for use, the area for changing pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) will be cleared. Further, a RAM clear top address 3 which will be described later is the top address of the area for game control, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for game control is cleared. Become.

Note that the status display area is initialized when it is abnormal by judging the validity in the status display edit output processing in the timer interrupt processing described later, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM with the RAM clear start address 1 set in this case, the state display area may be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM when the RAM clear start address 1 is set, all areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation processing of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. One or more of the probability setting value area, the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, the game control area, and the status display area may be targeted. When targeting multiple areas, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the correctness may be determined individually, or the checksums of the areas may be summed to determine the correctness. You may make it judge collectively.

When the body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 previously read whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23). When the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state are performed. If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N) or the body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24 and the previously read state of the third input port 124. Then, it is determined whether or not the set value change switch is in the on state (step S24).

When the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S30, and the process for the case where the power failure is normally restored is performed. If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the initial value random number area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area. Perform processing. That is, the set value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 stores data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Forms an initialization means for initializing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S19; N), step S25. Then, the processing for initializing all RAM areas is performed. That is, the probability setting value RAM area and the status display RAM area are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when the RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear top address 1 is set (step S25), and it is determined from the previously read state of the third input port 124 whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). If the body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 previously read whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state are performed. As will be described later, the RAM is initialized in steps S35 and S36. In this case, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value and the random value for the initial value are set. The area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control area (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. The area for displaying the status may be initialized here.

If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or the body frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is given to the effect control board (effect control device). 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and power-off of the gaming machine is awaited. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 are performed based on the reception of the command of the setting change instruction. , Prompts the user to change the probability setting value by outputting sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. This notification continues until the game machine is powered off.

In this case, if the front frame 12 is opened after turning off the power of the gaming machine and the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position and the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. It is determined that the switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state are performed. In addition, when the control is stopped in step S29, the front frame 12 is not opened after the power source of the gaming machine is shut off, or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the state cannot be changed to the probability set value changing state, so that the processes in steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

Although the notification is made by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may make the notification. For example, the notification may be performed on the collective display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100, and a display that is not used as identification information is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. Alternatively, a display may be provided to notify the abnormality.

In step S30 of FIG. 6 as a process when the power is restored normally, the initial value when the power is restored is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not fixed. Indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not fixed. Then, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step S31).

If the probability of the special figure is not high (step S31; N), steps S32 and S33 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S34. If the probability of the special figure is high (step S31; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30. The ON (lighting) data of is stored in the segment area (step S33).

And the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. Go to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information that is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the screen designation. A plurality of commands such as a command (for example, a customer waiting demo command when in the customer waiting state, a restoration screen command in other cases) is transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information which is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, and the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

The screen designation command transmits a command according to the restarted game state. When restarting the special figure variation display game interrupted due to the power shutdown with the restart of the control, a recovery screen command forming recovery information is transmitted as a screen designation command. Further, in this case, information regarding the result of the restarted special figure variation display game is also transmitted. Further, when the power is cut off in the customer waiting state and the control is restarted in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as the screen designation command. Further, in the case of restarting the special game state that was interrupted due to the power interruption accompanying the restart of the control, the special game state restart command is transmitted as the screen designation command.

Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S35) and initialized as the processing of initializing the RAM and the processing of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area (step S36). Here, when the backed up information is normal and the process shifts from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear start address 2 is set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the game control The RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the probability setting value area and the status display area are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for initial value random numbers and the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is abnormal and the process proceeds from step S27, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so the probability setting value area, the initial value random number area, and the fluctuation pattern random number area are set. And the game control area (work area and stack area) is cleared and the initial value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization unit that can initialize the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The area for displaying the status may be initialized here.

Further, the area to be initialized is an area in which a value other than 0 is desired to be set in the area cleared to 0, and is, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value becomes setting 1 by setting 0 in the probability setting value area. Since the probability setting value with the lowest probability is set, damage to the amusement store can be minimized even when the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or an illegal act. Note that if a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, the probability setting value changing flag is set as a process for changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state (step S37). As a result, the probability setting value change state is set. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, it becomes possible to display information on the probability setting value currently set on the probability setting value display device 153.

Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, the value is saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and the command whose probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). , And proceeds to step S45. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44 of the board effect device 44 are received based on the reception of the command during the change of the probability setting. A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is given by an operation, a voice output from the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like. Although the RAM is initialized, the command for RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. Also, settings for outputting a security signal are made. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability setting value is changed. Further, since the RAM has not been initialized yet here, the setting for outputting the security signal may be omitted.

Further, as the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, in step S41 of FIG. 6, the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S41), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42) and initialized. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the power area (step S43). As a result, the initial value random number area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. Also, a timer for outputting a security signal is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization unit that can initialize the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information that is the information of the selected probability setting value, the RAM initial A plurality of commands such as an activation command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information which is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, and the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

In step S45, processing for activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining the winning symbol of the special drawing). Predetermined RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number determining the hit of the universal figure (random number per hit), random number determining the hit symbol of the universal figure (random symbol per hit)) After saving in the area (step S47), the interruption is permitted (step S48). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number updating process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special figure variation display It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop pattern of the game. Also, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the universal figure variation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the hit stop symbol of the universal figure variation display game. Is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines. In this way, the randomness of random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process. Incidentally, the small hit random number does not naturally exist in a model without a small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no random number for the initial value of the winning symbol.

Further, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit. Is configured. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the unit of the timer interrupt processing. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or -1, or may be a random update by which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process in step S49, the number of times (for example, 2) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S50), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S51). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S49). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number updating process (step S49), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step S49 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process as well. In order to prevent the value random number updating process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S52; N), the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily interrupting (step S53) is performed. A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S58), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S59). ), wait until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the activation of the slave control device (a game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation section (setting value change button, setting key operation section) operable from the outside, and an initialization operation section. An initialization unit (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation, and reading the operation state of the initialization unit before the start of the standby time. Becomes

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

In the above main process, after performing the process of step S28, the process may return to the process of step S26, and the processes of steps S26 to S28 may be repeatedly performed until the setting key switch is turned on. .. That is, the game control may be stopped to wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124 instead of the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, when the state of repeating the processing of steps S26 to S28 continues for a certain period of time, the process may proceed to step S29 to wait for the power supply to be cut off.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value changing state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state. The open state of the frame 12 may not be a condition. Further, both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 may be opened, or only the glass frame 15 may be opened.

Alternatively, the setting key switch may not be provided, and the probability setting value changing state may be set only when the setting value changing switch is in the ON state. That is, the processing of steps S22 and S23 may not be performed, and when the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y), the process may proceed to step S35 of FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 of FIG. 6 for initializing the initial value random number area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control area is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value changing state. It is possible to initialize only the initial value random number area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control area by ending without setting or setting the same probability setting value and ending. If the setting value change switch is switched to the probability setting value change state only on the condition that the switch is on, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be used.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are the operation section (setting key operation section (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value). And a setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the control means is a storage means (RAM111C) capable of holding stored contents even in a power-off state. ), the validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the operation unit for selecting the probability setting value. An initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the above is provided, and the probability setting is performed when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. This means that the notification for prompting the selection of the value is made. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state. Further, by initializing the RAM 111C, the probability setting value information set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but by initializing the notification by prompting the selection of the probability setting value. By this, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value that is not intended by the gaming shop from being left set.

Further, the control means is configured so that the probability setting value can be selected when the operation section is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is stored by the validity determination means. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not valid, the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is continued until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being set by the initialization.

Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability setting value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being set by the initialization.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means, the game control means, When the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means determines the specific information. This means that the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is performed based on the reception of the. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being set by the initialization.

Further, when the specific information is received, the effect control means is configured to continue the notification prompting the selection of the probability setting value until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being set by the initialization.

In addition, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned are the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) is provided which allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value change switch 151), and the control means can retain the stored contents even in a power-off state. If the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, the storage unit (RAM111C) is restored based on the information stored and held in the storage unit. When the first operation section is operated, the changeable state is set so that the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means. When only the second operation section is operated when the power is turned on, the storage means is initialized. It is something that has been adapted. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game shop can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, it is possible to perform the operation of selecting the probability setting value and the operation of selecting the initialization using the same operation unit, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game store. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

Further, the control means is provided with a validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the validity determination means stores it in the storage means. When it is determined that the stored information is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, the notification that prompts the initialization of the storage unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to change the probability setting value by the setting means to a changeable state and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid and the first operation section is not operated, the first operation section is operated. This means that a notification prompting the power to be turned on is given. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state.

In addition, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change). It is necessary for the control of the game by the setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the switch 151)) and the control means that includes information on the probability setting values selected by the setting means. A storage unit capable of storing information (RAM 111C) is provided, and the control unit initializes the storage unit when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit among a plurality of operation units is operated. It is something that has been adapted. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game shop can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, universal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the launch permission state seen from the payout control device (the launch permission signal) is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to be launched.

Next, a random number update process 1 (step S105) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process, the special figure 1. Random number update processing 2 (step S106) for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the general-purpose gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are monitored to see if there is a normal signal input or to monitor for an error ( A winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S107) is performed to check whether the front frame or the glass frame is open.

Next, a probability setting value changing process (step S108) for changing or confirming the probability setting value is performed, and it is determined whether the probability setting value is changed (step S109). When the probability setting value changing state is set, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value change state is not set (step S109; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S110). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

If it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as a process relating to the progress of the game, a payout command transmission process (step S111) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, The special figure game process (step S112) for performing the process relating to the figure variable display game and the general figure game process (step S113) for performing the process relating to the general figure varying display game are performed. On the other hand, if it is in the probability setting value change state (step S109; Y) or in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process described above relating to the game is not performed and the process proceeds to step S114. That is, in the probability set value changing state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed.

In the probability setting value changing state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the payout command transmitting process (step S111), the special figure game process (step S112), and the general figure game process (step S113) are not performed. However, it may be performed for one or more of these. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed so that the prize balls are paid out. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the random number update process 1 (step S105) and the random number update process 2 (step S106) are not performed in the probability setting value changing state, and the random numbers are not updated in the probability setting value changing state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. You can Further, the type of processing that is not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, the segment LED edit processing (step S114) for driving the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents, the magnetic sensor 61. Magnet irregularity monitoring processing (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio irregularity for performing the processing for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S116) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) of setting signals to be output to various external devices is set in the output buffer, and the base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. A state display edit output process is performed to calculate (step S118), and the timer interrupt process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt prohibited state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the universal electric solenoid 37c are combined and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S143). S144). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door/frame open" data, "security signal" data) is output to a digit/external information output port. It is output to 136 (step S146).

Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S148). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (for example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, "big hit signal" 4” data, “symbol confirmation frequency signal” data, “starting mouth signal” data, “main prize ball signal” data) and launch permission output data are combined (step S150), and the combined data is obtained. The external information/launch permission signal is output to the output port 137 (step S151).

Next, the OFF output data of the probability setting value display is set as the display content on the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability setting value display permission flag is a flag that is set when the probability setting value display device 153 is permitted to display the probability setting value.

When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154), and the display data is output as the probability setting value display. The data is output to the port 134 (step S155). As a result, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the probability setting value. On the other hand, if the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 for displaying the probability setting value (step S155). In this case, the OFF output data set in step S152 is set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S158). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test-shooting test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability setting value display data is loaded as the test signal output data from the probability setting value display data area. That is, the data for display of the probability setting value display device 153 is used as it is for the information on the probability setting value of the test signal to the test shooting device. This simplifies the process and allows the output of accurate information without changing the probability setting value information. Of course, the display data may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S162), and if it is not in the on state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is in the ON state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch ON information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. Then, the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus (step S164), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to the prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output from the payout control device 200 to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor illegal payouts by comparing these two signals.

In each of these prize number counter areas, there is a prize number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (in the present embodiment, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in each of the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the fourteen prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the fourteen prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are each configured to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the number-of-wins counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the number-of-wins counter area to be checked among the plurality of number-of-wins counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. Determine whether there is a count number that is not. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182) to check whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

When it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value in the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining award ball area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main award ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. When the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information about the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the exact value generated during the big hit. It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). When the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. When the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control, the payout busy signal indicates an on state (busy state). To be done. That is, the payout busy signal can also be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal serves as a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

When this payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. If it is in a state, it is configured to send a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform wasteful processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shoot ball out error, during overflow error, during frame radio wave illegal occurrence, payout ball detection switch (paid ball The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (the number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of game balls remaining) ) (When not equal to 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the number-of-wins counter area 1 (step S195), “0” is set in the number-of-wins counter area to be checked out of the plurality of number-of-wins counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not.

Then, if there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196) to check whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 to repeat the above process. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is set. The payout amount command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S199). Then, the obtained payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 msec, for example, is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the gaming control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. In this case, the prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means is formed.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs due to some cause, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, a function for backing up is required, which causes a problem of cost increase. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing the payout control device 200 with a function for backing up.

In addition, the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, so the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

From the above, while performing the game control comprehensively, the game ball to the winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation winning device 38) provided in the game area 32 Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a prize, and payout control means (payout control device for controlling the payout of game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control device). 200), and the game control means pays out a prize ball command based on a status signal (busy signal) output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. When a power outage occurs and the power outage is recovered from, the payout control means immediately issues a prize ball command even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control without being transmitted to the payout control means for a predetermined period. I will do so.

In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of prize areas having different numbers of prize balls (starting prize hole 36, normal variable prize device 37, general prize hole 35, special variable prize device 38), and game control means (game controller 100) is provided. , A prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control has not been transmitted, and a state signal can start payout control. When there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicates that the payout control means This means that the determination as to whether or not the payout control can be started is performed before the determination as to whether or not there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter.

In addition, the game is controlled in a centralized manner, and a prize ball command is issued based on a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area (starting prize hole 36, normal variable prize device 37, general prize hole 35, special variable prize device 38). And a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The control means pays out the prize ball command when the status signal output from the payout control means indicating whether the payout control can be started indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information regarding the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of a game ball in a predetermined prize area. External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means is a state signal output from the payout control means, the payout control means can start the payout control. The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not there is any.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period, and a prize ball command is issued. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). With a ball signal counter (game control device 100), the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation). A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the winning device 38), and when the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the one prize ball command is issued to the payout control means (payout control device 200). ), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and the game in the predetermined prize area can be stored. By updating at the time of winning a ball, and updating in response to the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, it is possible to store the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted, and the external information output means, It is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of game balls in a predetermined prize area, and output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine each time the cumulative value reaches a predetermined number. The sphere signal counter can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and updates the game sphere in the predetermined prize area, and the prize ball by the external information output means. By updating in correspondence with the cumulative number processing, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not been cumulatively processed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal each time the planned number of payout game balls reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game ball numbers. The main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) and updates every 10 payout schedules (each time the payout command is transmitted). The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of outputs.
With respect to the main award ball signal output for each schedule, since the award ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payouts. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, even if the payout is delayed due to lack of balls, etc. Information can be collected (judged).

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 10 shows a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. In the winning opening switch/state monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not the probability setting value change state is set (step S299). When the probability setting value changing state is set, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set. If the probability setting value change state is not set (step S299; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S300). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processing after step S301 is performed as the processing regarding the progress of the game. On the other hand, if it is in the probability set value change state (step S299; Y) or in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability setting value changing state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed without performing the process related to winning.

In addition, in the probability setting value changing state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the special variation winning device 38 is monitored for fraud and winning, the normal movement winning device 37 is monitored for fraud and winning, and the winning opening is always available. The prize winning is not monitored, but it may be monitored for one or more of these. For example, the special variable winning device 38 and the normal variable winning device 37 may be monitored for fraud. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the type of processing that is not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, the prize-winning mouth monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the prize-winning entrance switches 38a in the prize-winning entrance (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S301). The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize in the winning opening and detect a normal prize.

In the winning hole monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, the fraudulent winning error notification command, the fraudulent winning The upper limit number (the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission/update) are defined. In addition to the number of times the monitoring is repeated (the number of switches), the winning table of the winning port monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and a winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The information of the lower address of is defined. The prize hole monitoring table is prepared in accordance with each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning a prize monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other winning a prize opening switch 38a in the award winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the winning a prize opening is not opened. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S304) is executed to monitor whether the mouth has an illegal prize and detect a normal prize.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Poden (step S305), and monitor Poden for an unauthorized winning even though Poden is not open. In addition, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S306) of detecting a normal prize is executed. Then, a prize opening monitoring table of a prize opening switch (eg, the start opening 1 switch 36a and the prize opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win is prepared (step S307), and the prize number counter for updating the prize number is updated. A process (step S308) is performed.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like. Monitoring of the state based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", the state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", the state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. It

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine status check process (step S313) for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch 63. The status monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "1", the status monitoring is set based on the signal output from the main frame opening detection switch 64. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch/status monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines the status such as whether an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. Monitoring of conditions based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

After that, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", and therefore is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 msec, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 msec.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows the probability setting value changing process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In the probability setting value changing process, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value is in a changed state (step S401). If the probability setting value is not in a changed state (step S401; N), the probability setting value can be confirmed. The probability setting value confirmation process is performed (step S422), and the probability setting value changing process is ended.

If the probability setting value change state is set (step S401; Y), -1 is updated if the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinction timer is 0. .. If the probability setting value extinction timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value information is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the output process (see FIG. 8) described above. If the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (step S403; N), the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, and the output processing described above causes the probability setting value display device 153 to display nothing.

Then, it is determined whether the probability setting value has been changed (step S405). The probability set value changed is a state in which a confirming operation described later is performed and the probability set value used in the game is newly set, and in this case, the probability set value changed flag is set. If the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability setting value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the setting value changing switch (step S406).

Then, in the determination as to whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the setting value change switch has changed to the ON state. That is, it is determined whether the probability setting value change button has been pressed. If there is no input from the setting value change switch (step S406; N), the process proceeds to step S411.

When there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the work probability set value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5. The values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively, and the value in the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value will change sequentially. It should be noted that when the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the work probability setting value area is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value used for the game is not changed. The probability setting value selected based on the confirming operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Moreover, although the number of probability setting values is six here, it is also possible to set it to another number.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes information on the newly selected probability setting value. Then, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinction timer area (step S409), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). Thereby, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the set value change button, the display of the probability set value display device 153 is turned off and a blank display in which nothing is displayed is performed, and then the new probability set value information is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, the blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as the specific display, but a display other than this may be set. For example, when the numbers 1 to 6 are used to display the probability setting value, the display other than the numbers may be used as the specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as the display of the probability setting value. Further, when the probability setting values are displayed in a continuous lighting state, the updated probability setting values may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the specific display has elapsed. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode in which the display blinks, a display mode in which the blinking cycle is different from the case where the display is not the specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from the case where the display is not the specific display. ..

Also, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the set value change button, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, the board effect device 44. It is also possible to perform a specific notification, which is a notification that the selected probability setting value has been changed, by the above operation, the output of voice from the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like. That is, the specific notification may be given together with the specific display or instead of the specific display. Further, the same display as the probability set value display device 153 may be displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 display 51, and the special figure 2 display.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411). The touch switch is a sensor that can detect contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. If there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value changing process ends. If there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value of the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). Thereby, the selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used in the game. That is, touching the operation handle 24 is a confirming operation for confirming the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be a confirming operation, and an operating unit for confirming operation may be provided in the setting means.

Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), a command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value changing process is ended. .. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, and the display of the board effect device 44 are performed based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting value. The fact that the probability setting value has been changed is notified by an operation, voice output from the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not turned off (step S416; N), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position, the probability setting value changing process ends. If the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (step S417), and the clear target is set. The RAM area of 0 is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S419).

As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. Also, a timer for outputting a security signal is set. That is, the probability setting value region, the initial value random number region, the variation pattern random number region, and the state display region are not initialized. However, the area for initial value random numbers and the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers may be cleared. Also, among the areas for probability setting values, areas related to changing work, such as the work probability setting value area for temporarily storing information on the probability setting values selected in the probability setting value changing state and various flags, are cleared. It Therefore, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared, and the display on the probability setting value display device 153 ends. Further, since the probability setting value changing flag is cleared, the probability setting value changing state ends.

Next, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area (step S420), and a command for ending the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) ( (Step S421), and the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, and the display of the board effect device 44 are performed based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting value. The fact that the change of the probability setting value is completed is notified by the operation, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, probability setting value information that is information of the selected probability setting value, and probability setting. A plurality of commands such as a command for ending the change (a command for displaying the customer waiting demo screen and for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information which is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, and the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the result of the game is the special result, the game machine is capable of generating the special game state that gives the player a game value. The probability setting values to which the probability values used in the lottery are assigned are set to a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). From the operation of the operation unit, the setting unit (gaming control device 100) is provided, and the setting unit includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value. When the display on the display unit is updated as the probability setting value is selected, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

Further, the setting means is adapted to display, as the specific display, a display that is not used as the display of the probability setting value information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

Further, the setting means is configured to display the updated information for a certain period of time in a manner different from that after the certain period of time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting value confirmation processing (step S422) in the probability setting value changing processing. In this probability setting value confirmation processing, it is first determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value confirmation mode flag can be determined because the flag is set.

If it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed is set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153. After that, it is determined whether the game is being played (step S433).

"Playing" refers to the case where the special figure variation display game is being executed, the public figure variation display game is being executed, the special game state or the general figure hit state is applicable. That is, this is a case where the game state is a prohibition state that prohibits starting the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is being played (step S433; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. That is, when the game is being played, the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. In this case, it is possible to transmit information to the effect control device 300 that the probability setting value confirmation mode cannot be entered because the game is being played, and notify that effect.

The conditions for determining that the game is in play (prohibited state) are not limited to those described above. The condition may be one or more states selected from the running state of the special figure variation display game, the execution of the general figure variation display game, the special game state, and the hit state of the general figure. It may be determined that the game is being played when either the variable display game is being executed or the special game state is being applied. In addition, conditions other than the above may be added, for example, if the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered.

In addition, even if the game is not played for a predetermined period after the game balls are detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished the game, the probability set value confirmation mode may not be set. good. Further, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered. In addition, it is possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode during the power saving mode in which a certain period of time elapses while no game is being played. The power saving mode is released when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

When the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state, that is, whether the operating portion has been operated to bring it into the predetermined state (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. If the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set (step S435), and the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S436). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, and the information of the probability setting value currently set is displayed as the display of the probability setting value display device 153.

After that, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437), the command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process is performed. finish. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the board effect are performed based on the reception of the command during the confirmation of the probability set value. The operation of the device 44, the voice output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like notify that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

On the other hand, when it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S439). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. In this case, the probability set value confirmation mode continues.

If the setting key switch is not on (step S439; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends, and the probability setting value display device 153 is set to display nothing. Then, a command to end the probability set value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S442), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed, based on the reception of the command for confirming the probability setting value.

That is, the probability set value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position with the power turned on, and ended by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state is set.

As described above, even if the setting key switch is turned on during the game, the probability setting value confirmation mode is prevented from shifting to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress. It is possible to secure the fairness of the game. It should be noted that even if the setting key switch is turned on during the game, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not shifted, but the setting key switch is turned on during the game, and the state is not in the game with the on state. When it becomes, it shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, the condition for not shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode is set to be during the game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode depending on the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100. Anything can be used as long as it can be selected whether or not. For example, in the high probability state, the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered. Further, as will be described later, it is possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode when a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to the player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value). And a setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the setting means is based on the operation portion being operated to a predetermined state. , If the probability setting value can be confirmed, and the game state controlled by the control means is a prohibition state that prohibits starting the confirmation state, the operation unit is This means that the confirmation state is not set even in the predetermined state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to the probability setting value being shown.

The prohibited state means that the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, the prohibited state is a state during the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the prize cannot be won and an open state in which the prize can be easily won, and a normal variable winning device 37 that can generate a game execution right by winning, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the above, a general figure game (general figure variation display game) is executed, and when the result of the general figure game becomes a specific result, the normal variation winning device 37 is converted into an open state (general figure hit state). It is provided with a normal variation winning device control means (game control device 100) that can be generated, and the prohibited state is a state in which the general-university game is being executed or is in a hit state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, the setting means sets the operation unit to a predetermined state when the game state controlled by the control means is in the prohibited state, and when the prohibited state ends with the predetermined state, the prohibited state Upon completion, the confirmation state is set. Therefore, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a starting port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, if a game ball is won in the normal winning a prize device 36 that forms the starting winning award port 36 and the second starting award winning port, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the special prize based on the award is obtained. Before the start of the figure variation display game, a game result pre-judgment for pre-judging a game result based on a prize is performed.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, refer to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the variation start setting and effect setting of the special figure variation display game and the special figure variation are in progress. Special figure normal processing (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
If the special figure game process number is "1" in step A7, the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure and the information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process are performed. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2" and the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, and a special winning opening for each big hit A special figure displaying process (step A10) for setting a fanfare time according to the opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval process is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and the information necessary for performing the special opening opening processing is set. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, or the special winning opening remains. A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and the big hit ending process are executed. The special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for the execution is performed.
When the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit ending process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure normal process.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to perform the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit. A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) for setting necessary information is performed.
When the special figure game process number is "8" in step A7, a small hit mid-process (step A16) is performed to set an ending command and information necessary to perform the small hit remaining ball process. ..
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls won in the special winning opening during the small hit medium process and a small hit ending process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for carrying out is carried out.
When the special figure game process number is "10" in step A7, a small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure normal process.

After that, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step A20) concerning the control of fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 indicator 51 is done .. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), a symbol variation control process (step A22) relating to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. , The special figure game process ends. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

The small hit is a result mode in which the condition device is not operated, and the big hit is a special result in which the condition device is operated. The condition device is a device that operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). When the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step A101), the hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and then, 1 It is determined whether or not there is a winning in the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning in the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (supporting normal electric power) (step A104). ).

When it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. An effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, in the time saving state, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) does not win unless left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win right-handedly. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the game state in which the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed is a gaming state, but when there is a winning in the first starting opening during the time-shortened (that is, when left-handed is hit during the time-shortened) In addition, the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the right control.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a winning monitoring table for the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) (step A109) and perform a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) to determine whether or not there is a winning for the second starting opening. The determination is made (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting opening (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the ordinary variation. It is determined whether or not the prize winning device 37 is operated and the gaming ball is in the open state in which the prize can be won (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric auditors are operating (step A112; Y), The processing shifts to A114 and the subsequent processing is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal electric power generation is occurring (step A113).

In the determination as to whether or not the regular electric fraud has occurred, it is determined that the fraud has occurred if the number of illegally awarded prizes for the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball that won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent winning number. When the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than the predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When it is determined in step A113 that the illegal attempt to generate a regular call is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) (step A114), The starting port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring process ends. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the unauthorized use of general electric power is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described starting opening switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process, first of all, there is no winning information of the starting opening to be monitored among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37). After setting (step A121), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

When there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, when the random number is not extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register to be prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37), the winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Common processing for special figure start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is provided to the gaming machine 10. The starting port signal output number, which is the number of output to the external management device, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output number overflows (step A133). ). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure suspension (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.

If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1 ( (Step A136), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the special figure holding number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored as the big hit random number of RWM. The data is saved in the area (step A139). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting mouth switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether the winning is the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
When it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, in step A142, when it is determined that the winning is to the first starting opening (step A142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and a small hit symbol of RWM. The data is saved in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared (step A147), and the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed to perform the special figure start port common process. finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variation display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit is formed as a storage. Further, the starting storage means (game control device 100) uses various random number values extracted based on winning of the game balls into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Various random number values that are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) in the above-described common opening switch process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 of the special drawing starting opening switch common processing is checked to determine whether the winning is to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36). (Step A151).
When it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first starting opening (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is being shortened (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing is not shortened (step A152; N), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is in progress (step A153).
When it is determined in step A153 that the big hit or the small hit is in progress (step A153; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit or the small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. The big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch is set (step A156), and at step A140 of the special drawing starting mouth switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is in the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
In step A158, when it is determined that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A158 that the winning is to the first starting opening (step A158; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value, which means that the small hit is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not is performed. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a read-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) of setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process of setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A166). A167).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure reservation information determination processing is ended.

The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 that are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process. That is, the determination is performed according to the set probability setting value. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, a read-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the pre-reading target, and a pre-reading variation pattern command including the variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thus, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It becomes possible to inform.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning award storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Determines whether or not) forms a pre-determination means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Special processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is "0" (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reserved number (first starting memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special characters 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has started (step A309), and if the customer waiting demo has not started (step A309). A309; N) sets the customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special figure normal processing is ended. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started, but the starting condition is not satisfied, a customer waiting demo command that forms waiting information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demo has been started (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing the processes of steps A310 to A312.

If the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" in step A301 (step A301; N), a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step A302). Next, the effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, the special figure 2 variation start process (step A304) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended.
If the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" in step A305 (step A305; N), a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step A306). Next, the effect command setting process (step A307) is performed, the special figure 1 variation start process (step A308) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number is checked, if the special figure 2 pending number is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. It forms a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step A321), and first. To set deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether the special figure changing display game is a big hit, and to determine whether the first special figure changing display game is a small hit The big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the deviation information and the small hit information to the small hit flag is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) of setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process of setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, as the process number, "1" for the special figure changing process is set (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A333). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 19B, first, a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step A341), and the second The big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, as the process number, "1" for the special figure changing process is set (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A353). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start processing or special figure 2 variation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests or informs the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing performed in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing (step A342) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this jackpot determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the big hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A382), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value may be changed depending on the probability setting value or the probability state. Is also good. In this case, like the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. And set it. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment process is ended. It should be noted that the out-of-range in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be determined as a small hit in the subsequent small hit determination process. Moreover, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; N), it is judged whether or not it is in the high probability state (step A384). Then, in the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is acquired (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). ). If it is not in the high probability state (step A384; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). .. The upper limit determination value acquired here is obtained by referring to the upper limit determination value table set in step A381 described above.

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A358), and the big hit judgment process is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; N), that is, if it is the big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 21, in this small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Also, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. Moreover, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value do not overlap in the same probability setting value. The range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value for different probability setting values may or may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged as a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value, the small hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit determination value is the same even if the probability setting values are different. When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the big hit judgment process is ended. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; N), that is, if it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step A405), and the small hit judgment process is ended. To do.

As in the case of the big hit judgment, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively defined in the judgment value table provided for each probability setting value. Further, the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting values are different, but the small hit lower limit judgment value may be changed depending on the probability setting value. In this case, depending on the probability setting value. Select the small hit lower limit judgment value.

The probability setting value referred to in the process of setting the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381) and the process of setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401) is shown. If the value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, it may be set as a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or if an abnormality occurs. You may make it stop a game and perform error notification. Further, although the probability setting value is referred to for each big hit judgment and each small hit judgment, when the probability set value is set in the probability set value changing state, the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the set probability set value It is also possible to perform a process of setting a small hit upper limit judgment value and only refer to this when making a big hit judgment or a small hit judgment.

[Processing during fluctuation of special map]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol determination flag (special figure 1 changing flag or special figure 2 changing flag) is prepared (step A601), and the effect command is set. Processing is performed (step A602). That is, the symbol stop command forming stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variation time of the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. In the effect control device 300, when the symbol stop command is received, the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is stopped and the result is stopped and displayed.

Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 msec regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is out of alignment, the big hit symbol pattern or the small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop symbol pattern. .. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, the process number "2" relating to the process during special figure display is set as the process number (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606).

Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and a signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (eg, special symbol) (2 signal during fluctuation) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer initial is set in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area related to the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal is executed. The value (for example, 256 msec) is saved (step A609). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610). ), as a control information of the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step A611), and the special figure changing process is ended.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM's Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (Step A703), processing of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A704). Then, it is judged whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is judged as a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit of the second special figure variation display game (special big hit 2 big hit) is started. Save the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 is ON signal) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706) and the jackpot is the jackpot (step A706). A706; Y), it is determined that the test signal (for example, the condition device in-operation signal is ON, the accessory continuous operation device in-operation signal is on, regarding the start of the big hit of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 big hit), The signal per special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the process for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “16” or “4”) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. The number of rounds is saved in the maximum number of rounds area (step A710). Then, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step) A717) is performed. This fanfare command constitutes the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the special winning opening information and a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a jackpot with a payout (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and a jackpot without a jackpot (so-called sudden jackpot. When the information is the special winning opening opening information 1), it is turned on when the big hit is made in the time saving state, and turned off otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit is a big hit and is OFF when the big hit is a big hit.

After that, the big winning opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the general figure fluctuation display game and special figure fluctuation display game After setting (step A719), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the special game state is finished is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) corresponding to the special opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the special opening opening information is awarded. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A724) for shifting to the fanfare/interval processing is performed, and the special figure displaying processing is ended. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 into the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), a high-probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high-probability state. The high probability variation number update process (step A726) for updating the value of (high probability variation number) and the production mode information check process (step A727) regarding the production mode setting are performed, and the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high. It is determined whether there is a probability state (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step A729) to set the effect command. Processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special figure is high (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is played. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the person from being aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, as the processing number, "7" relating to the small hit fanfare processing is set (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (big hit + small hit is output. )) is saved in the external information output data area (step A737), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A739), and the fraud monitoring outside-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, a signal relating to a right-handed instruction (turning on the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the indicator LED (for example, the first gaming state display portion 57) during right-handed driving is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not the small hit (step A725; N), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state is high. The high probability variation number update processing (step A743) for updating the value of the area (high probability variation number) and the production mode information check processing (step A744) relating to the production mode setting are performed, and the switching preparation remaining rotation corresponding to the production mode number is performed. The number is set (step A745), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A746). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any of the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. It may be (rotation speed), or may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
When it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A746; N), "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A749). ), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A750), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752), and the special figure displaying process is ended.

On the other hand, in step A746, when it is determined that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switch preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to step A749. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing prefetch production from being performed a few rotations before the production mode is switched. By transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, production is performed across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions from occurring.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the general figure variable display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the universal figure game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the universal electric prize switch for monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. The monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the universal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

If the value of the universal figure game processing timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, it is referred to branch to the processing corresponding to the universal figure game processing number. A process of setting the universal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the universal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the general figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the general figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of variation start and effect setting of the general figure variation display game and the variation of general figure are in progress. An ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the figure game process number is "1" at step B7, a figure figure changing process (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the figure image displaying process.

In step B7, if the universal figure game processing number is "2", and if the result of the universal figure variable display game is a hit, the universal battery open time is set according to whether or not the state is in a time saving state. Alternatively, the processing for displaying a general figure (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the processing for a general figure.
Further, in step B7, if the universal figure game processing number is "3", the processing during the universal figure hitting is continued, or the information necessary for performing the routine electric ball remaining ball processing is set, etc. The process (step B11) is performed.

If the universal figure game process number is "4" at step B7, the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B12) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the universal figure end process.
Further, in step B7, when the figure/universal figure game processing number is "5", the per-universal-university-person ending processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the figure/universal figure ordinary processing is executed.

After that, after preparing the universal figure fluctuation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure indicator (step B14), the symbol variation control processing concerning the control of variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure indicator 53 (step B15) is performed, and the ordinary figure game process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the normal/universal figure ordinary process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal figure reserved number is “0” (step B301), and when the normal/universal figure reserved number is “0” (step B301; ) Sets "0" related to the ordinary figure normal process as the process number (step B322), and saves the process number in the universal figure game process number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the ordinary figure normal process ends.

In addition, when the general figure reservation number is not “0” (step B301; N), the random number is stored from the RWM per random number storage area (for reservation number 1), the random number per symbol storage area (for reservation number 1), The loaded area, that is, the hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a hit result in the universal figure variation display game is It is determined whether or not the probability that the figure is higher than the normal probability (that is, the probability that the figure is low) is high, that is, the state is in a time saving state (step B303).

When it is not during the high probability of universal figure (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit determination value) at the time of low probability of universal figure is set (step B304), and when it is during high probability of universal figure (step B303). ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of high probability of universal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306). When the value of the hit random number is not equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306; N), the value of the hit random number is step B304 or B305. It is determined whether or not it is less than the lower limit determination value set in (step B307).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306; Y) or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the hit flag Save the deviation information in the area (step B308), set the deviation stop symbol number (step B309), save the deviation symbol information in the regular figure stop symbol information area (step B310), and stop the regular symbol number Save in the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the hit information loaded in step B302 is entered. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is the regular symbol stop symbol. The data is saved in the area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of low probability of universal figure is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of high probability of universal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251” and the high probability lower limit determination value are “1”. Therefore, at the time of low probability of universal figure, there is a deviation when the value of the random number per hit is "0" to "250". Further, at the time of high probability of universal figure, the case where the value of the random number per hit is any of "1" to "250" is a hit, and the case where the value of the random number per hit is "0" is out of range.
In the case of the present embodiment, there are two types of winning symbols.

After saving the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Then, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the vacant area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the ordinary figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, a process of moving up the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 which are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 one by one. I do. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 for public figures in the random number storage area per general figure to the number of retained figures of 4 for general figures are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 for general figures in the random number storage area for one figure to 3 for the number of retained figures Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation pattern random number 3 is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B320). Then, the general figure changing process shift setting process (step B321) for shifting to the general figure changing process is performed, and the ordinary figure normal process ends. That is, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure variation display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the universal figure starting gate 34 (inflow region) (based on the regular figure starting memory). Make up.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, the fluctuation time is set to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. ..

[Processing during fluctuations in general figure]
Next, details of the routine figure changing process (step B9) in the aforementioned routine figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the routine figure changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" relating to the routine figure displaying process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the routine figure game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the figure display time (600 msec, for example), which is the display time of the result of the figure change display game on the figure display 53, is saved in the figure game processing timer area (step B403), and the figure change ends. A signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and a stop flag indicating that the universal figure variation display game is stopped is placed in the universal figure variation control flag area. It saves (step B405), and ends the process of changing the universal figure.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, details of the general figure displaying process (step B10) in the above general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or off information) set in the normal figure normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" which is related to the normal figure normal process is set as the process number (step B515), and the process number is saved in the general figure game process number area (step). B516). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flagging fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the process of displaying the universal figure is ended.

On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hitting process setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer (for example, "0" Or "5") is acquired and saved in the control pointer area in the normal figure (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer (for example, "4" or "7") corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the end pointer area for universal figure (step B506). Next, the universal communication opening time (for example, 1700 msec or 2600 msec) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B507).

Then, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the process of hitting the ordinary figure (step B508), and the process number is saved in the figure game process number area (step B509). After that, a signal related to the start of hitting the universal figure variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 hitting signal is ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric actuation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) are test signals. The data is saved in the output data area (step B510) and a signal for driving (turning on) the universal solenoid is output, so the on data is saved in the ordinary solenoid output data area (step B511).

Further, the information of the Poden count number area that stores the number of winnings in the ordinary variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings in the ordinary variation winning device 37 during the fraud monitoring period is stored in Hoden. The information of the illegal prize number area is cleared (step B513). Then, the flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (flag outside the fraud monitoring period) is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing for displaying the universal figure ends.

[Usually hit processing]
Next, details of the during-universal-game hitting process (step B11) in the above-described general-universal-drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the processing for hitting a universal figure, first, a control pointer for hitting a universal figure is loaded and prepared (step B601). It is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer for hitting a general figure is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer for hitting a personal figure is updated by +1 (step B603), and the value of the control pointer for hitting a personal figure (step B602) (step B603). Branch processing is performed according to (value before +1 update in B603) (step B604).
In addition, when the value of the control pointer during hitting the universal figure is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the processing during which the control pointer area during hitting the ordinary figure is incremented by +1 is not performed, and Branch processing is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B604).

If the value of the control pointer is "0", "2" or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the closing of the normal variable winning device 37, and thus the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer. The wait time after blockage of 37 is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B605), and the OFF data is saved in the universal electric solenoid output data area to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (step B606). The process in FIG.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, and thus the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is operated. The ordinary electric opening time which is the opening time is saved in the ordinary figure game processing timer area (step B607), and the ON data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area to turn on the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (step B608). The process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, and thus the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer. The normal electric opening time is saved in the general electric game processing timer area (step B609), and the ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B610). The process ends.

If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611 to end the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the normal electric remaining ball process, and thus the process number. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (step B612), and the ordinary electric ball remaining processing time is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B614), and the ordinary figure hitting process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B605, a wait time of 300 msec is set, in step B607, a normal power release time is set to 1700 msec, and in step B609, a normal power release time is set to 2600 msec, to step B613. Save 600 msec as the processing time for the remaining ball on the Den Den.
Further, when the universal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing for displaying the universal map, "1700 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal call release time is "1700 msec" and the normal call is released for 1700 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the universal communication, so that the general electric train opens for 1700 msec. Then, the control pointer is updated to "2" during the universal communication for 300 msec. Wait time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the public figure, so the electric train is opened for 1700 msec, and then 600 msec because the control pointer is updated to "4" during the public figure. Set the processing time for the remaining sphere of normal electric power.

Further, when the universal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing for displaying the universal map, "2600 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec elapses, the normal call open time is "2600 msec", so the normal call opens for 2600 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "6" during the public figure, so that the Poden opens for 2600 msec. Then, the control pointer is updated to "7" during the public figure for 600 msec. Hoden remaining ball processing time is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes the general figure game (general figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the general figure game is a specific result, the ordinary variation winning device 37 is opened. It constitutes a normal variable winning device control means capable of generating a hit state (universal figure hit state) to be converted.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S111), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S107), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), and the board radio fraud monitoring process (step S116) are used as the monitoring results. Based on this, processing for creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal, an amusement hall internal management device, or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step S801; N) and the body frame opening error is not occurring (step S802; N), , OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door/frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

If the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", it is updated by -1 ( Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is started by clearing the RAM in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. Process shifts to. If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the process of step S809 is skipped and the process of step S810 is performed. Transition.

Then, when the magnet illegality is occurring (step S810; Y), when the board electric wave illegality is occurring (step S811; Y), when the frame electric wave irregularity is occurring (step S812; Y), When the illegal transmission is occurring (step S813; Y), or when the special winning opening is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area ( In step S817), ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither the occurrence of magnet fraud (step S810; N), the occurrence of board radio fraud (step S811; N), the occurrence of frame radio fraud (step S812; N), nor the occurrence of universal electric fraud (Step S813; N), if the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (Step S814; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality is occurring (Step S815).
When the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. When the switch abnormality is not occurring (step S815; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step S820) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is "0" (step S822).

When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process ends.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S822). (S824), the external information editing process ends.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 32 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed, the effect contents are changed.

Then, the hall/player setting mode process is performed for accepting operations such as the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and the change of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) of updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) that analyzes and responds to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) that performs settings for controlling the progress of the effect and edits of drawing commands. ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since the system cycle (one frame is 1/30 seconds) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching in later than 1/60 seconds). May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing has come (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), LED control for the panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18, sub information display device 90, etc. The decoration control process (step C18) to be performed, the movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, and the process returns to the process to clear WDT (step C8).

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the command reception number is completed is completed. It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. Is configured. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to make a vacant space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207) and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process ends. As described above, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis processing is ended.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variable commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of big hit commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command related to small hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; Y), the big hit type command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), the symbol system command process (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as the hold number command and error command. (Step C241). The single-shot command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination like a pattern command and a variable command. This one-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error/illegal system command, a model designation command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot system command (step C241; Y), the single-shot system command process (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol commands (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

In addition, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (step C245). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

The look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the starting memory (hold) for which the special figure variation display game is not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from usual, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variation system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the starting memory which becomes the target of pre-reading production, from game control control equipment 100 at the time of starting winning a prize It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

Further, with respect to a command related to power-on and a command related to a probability setting value, a corresponding process is performed by a single-shot system command process. Examples of commands related to power-on include commands for power failure recovery and commands for RAM initialization. Examples of the command relating to the probability setting value include commands for changing probability setting, changing probability setting value, ending probability setting change, checking probability setting value, and ending confirmation of probability setting value.

In the first embodiment described above, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the probability set value confirmation mode. However, the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in this case, the state may be changed to the probability setting value change state. However, since the RAM is initialized with the end of the probability setting value changing state, it is executed during the special figure variation display game, the general figure variation display game, the special game state, or the general figure hit state. It may be a condition that does not correspond to. Further, it may be on condition that the customer is in a waiting state. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, the probability setting value change state may not be set.

Although the RAM 111C is initialized when the probability setting value change state ends, the RAM 111C may not be initialized unless it is determined that the data in the RAM 111C is abnormal.

Although the probability values corresponding to the respective probability setting values are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35A shows probability setting values in this embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C takes a value of 0-5. The work probability setting value region is also the same. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The probability setting value display device 153 displays 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability setting value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in the settings 1 to 6.

FIG. 35B shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the probability values of setting 1 to setting 3 are assigned as setting 4 to setting 6. Therefore, it is possible to switch the probability values in three steps. Other than this, it is similar to FIG. By doing so, if the six-step probability values are unnecessary, only the probability values need to be different, and the design can be easily changed.

Note that which probability setting value is assigned to which probability value is arbitrary. For example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value of the probability setting value area (working probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by operating the setting value changing button, the order of the probability values that change when the setting value changing button is operated by changing the allocation is different. In order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to the two probability setting values, then there are four stages of change, and any one of the first to sixth stages.

FIG. 35C also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the settings 4 to 6 in FIG. 35B are set to settings 1 to 3, and the display on the probability set value display device 153 is also set to 1 to 3 correspondingly. As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, and it is possible for an operator in charge of work to easily understand the probability value.

FIG. 35D also shows an example in which the probability values are assigned differently. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, substantially only one probability value can be set, and even if the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to deal with it by setting the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, even if the set value change button is operated, the same display is displayed on the probability set value display device 153, but the operation is performed by performing the specific display (for example, blank display) as described above. It will be easier for the worker to understand that it has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value area is 6, the number may be other than this. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35B and 35C, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 35D, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be one. Further, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be set to 7 or more in order to be able to set a larger number of steps. Although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the selected probability value.

Also, although the big hit probability value is assigned according to the probability setting value, the small hit probability value is also assigned, and the small hit probability value is also changed according to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The big hit probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability setting value can be independently determined. However, when only the big hits and the small hits are obtained as a result of the special figure variation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small hits according to the probability value of the big hits. Further, the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Further, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of a hit result of the universal figure variation display game may be set according to a probability setting value that defines a probability value of a big hit, or may be set independently.

Further, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, etc. are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, when the function for changing the probability value is unnecessary. In this case, the setting sub-board may be removed, and the connection section of the game control device 100 with the setting sub-board may be connected to a sub-board that has been subjected to termination processing such as GND connection. By doing so, only the function of changing the probability value can be eliminated without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and the cost can be reduced. In addition, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability varying function, the operation probability M may be provided for each probability setting value.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the game control device 100 transmits a command instructing the payout to the payout control device 200 when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in the present modified example includes a storage unit capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is off. This storage means is configured to store the information of the payout command received from the game control device 100, and to pay out based on the information stored here. In this way, the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, so that the game control device 100 sequentially sends the payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. .. Therefore, the information of the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage means of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
The gaming machine of the present modification performs the main processing shown in FIG. 36 instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, when the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). The payout control device 200 starts the payout based on the information backed up in its own storage means on the basis of receiving the command of the payout instruction. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be made based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and the profit for the player is prevented from being impaired. it can.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to the notification of prompting the change of the probability setting value, the notification that the payout may be performed may be performed. May be. In addition, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200, not limited to the above case. For example, in the case of transmitting the command whose probability setting is being changed to the effect control device 300 in FIG. S40) or when sending a command for RAM initialization to effect control device 300 (step S44), a payout control command (specific information) may be sent to payout control device 200.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, the production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production of the game, and the probability value used for the lottery of the game are assigned based on the information from the game control means. A setting means that makes it possible to select the obtained probability setting value from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) A game control device 100) and a payout control device (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of a game medium based on payout information from the game control device. The game control device stores the stored contents even in a power-off state. A storage means (RAM 111C) capable of holding the information, a validity determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and a probability setting value is selected. If the information stored in the storage means is not valid by the validity determination means, the initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for When it is determined, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means issues a notification prompting the selection of the probability setting value based on the reception of the specific information. The payout control means is provided with a payout information storage means capable of holding the stored contents even in a power-off state and capable of storing the payout information received from the game control means, and when the specific information is received, the payout information storage means stores the payout information. The game media is controlled to be paid out based on the payout information. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the profit obtained by the player from being impaired. Further, by initializing the RAM 111C, the probability setting value information set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but by initializing the notification by prompting the selection of the probability setting value. By this, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value that is not intended by the gaming shop from being left set.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is provided with a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In the probability setting value changing process, a confirmation condition monitoring process (step S450) is performed to monitor whether or not a condition for confirming the selected probability setting value is satisfied.

[Fixed condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the definite condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and if there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end standby flag (step S457), performs the processes of steps S412 to S415, and ends the finalized condition monitoring process.

That is, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first confirming condition based on the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second confirmation condition, as will be described later. Here, the second confirmation condition is satisfied because the first confirmation condition based on the input from the touch switch is satisfied. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor, the end wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, if there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, if the first confirmation condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether there is an end standby flag (step S451). If there is an end standby flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end standby flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

When the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the fixed condition monitoring process ends. In this case, the probability setting value changing state continues. If the setting key switch is off (step S452; Y), the initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is saved in the change end timer area (step S453), and the end standby flag is set (step S454).

Then, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). When the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the fixed condition monitoring process ends. If the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing from step S457 onward is performed, and the finalized condition monitoring processing ends. That is, the second confirmation condition is satisfied when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch which is the second operation is performed, and the selected probability setting value is set. It has become so.

As described above, in the present modification, the probability setting value selected when either the first confirming condition or the second confirming condition is satisfied is set as the probability setting value used in the game. Until these confirmation conditions are satisfied, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored has been changed. Absent. Therefore, if the power is shut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In the probability setting value changing state, it may be notified that the probability setting value selected by touching the operation handle 24 is set. This notification may be always performed in the probability setting value changing state, or may be performed only in the state in which the end standby flag is set. Further, the first confirmation condition and the second confirmation condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the second confirmation condition may be only that the setting key switch is in the off state. Alternatively, the probability setting value selected may be set when three or more definite conditions are prepared and any one of them is satisfied.

Further, although it is assumed that the original probability setting value is set when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, when the probability setting value change state is started, the information of the probability setting value area is set to an initial value (for example, setting 1), and when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, this initial value is set. May be set. The initial value in this case can be set to an arbitrary probability setting value in advance. For example, the same probability setting value as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be set value.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value). And a setting means (gaming control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the setting means determines that one of a plurality of confirmation conditions is satisfied. The probability setting value selected based on this is set. Therefore, the probability setting value can be surely changed. Further, by providing a plurality of confirmation conditions, the degree of freedom of work can be increased, and the work efficiency at the game store can be improved.

Further, the setting means does not set the selected probability setting value when the power is cut off before any of the plurality of definite conditions is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

Further, the plurality of finalizing conditions include a first finalizing condition and a second finalizing condition, and the first finalizing condition is that a predetermined first operation is performed, and the second finalizing condition is the first operation. Means that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, the probability setting value can be surely changed.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification does not include a setting key operation unit in the setting means, and the setting key switch 152 is not provided. In addition, the transition condition to the changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed is different.

[Main processing]
The gaming machine of the present modification performs the main processing shown in FIG. 39 instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, if the backed up information is normal and the probability setting value change state is not set (step S21; N), is the setting value change switch turned on from the previously read state of the third input port 124? Is determined (step S61).

If the set value change switch is not in the on state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 6 to perform the process when the power failure is normally restored. If the set value change switch is in the on state (step S61; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination processing, it is determined whether the transition condition to the probability setting value changing state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. ..

If the probability setting value changing flag is set in the shift determination processing (step S63; Y), the process for initializing the RAM and changing the setting value to the probability setting value changing state The process moves to step S35 of 6. In this modification, since the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 may not be performed. Further, if the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the shift determination process (step S63; N), the process shifts to step S41 of FIG. 6 to initialize the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is not normal, after setting the RAM clear start address 1 (step S25), is the setting value change switch in the ON state from the state of the third input port 124 previously read? Is determined (step S64). When the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S64; N), the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), and RAM access is prohibited. (Step S29), the control is stopped and the game machine is powered off.

If the set value change switch is in the on state (step S64; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S65). This shift determination process is the same process as step S62. When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination processing (step S66; Y), in order to perform the processing of initializing the RAM and the processing of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state. The process moves to step S35 in FIG. When the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the shift determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition determination process]
FIG. 40 shows the shift determination processing (steps S62 and S65) in the above-mentioned main processing. In this transition determination process, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

In this modified example, a staff member can shift to a probability set value changing state by inserting game balls into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the gaming area 32. The state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input determines whether or not this transition condition is satisfied. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y), the probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination process is ended. As a result, the state is changed to the probability setting value change state.

If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), if the transition standby timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75). .. Then, when the shift standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the shift standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the shift determination process ends. That is, when the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, if the backed up data is normal, the process moves to step S41 of FIG. 6 to perform the initialization processing of the RAM area for game control, and if the backed up data is abnormal. Means that the processes of steps S28 and S29 are performed and the control is stopped.

The transition condition may or may not be changeable at the game shop. Further, the transition condition is to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, but it is also possible to put a predetermined number of game balls in the predetermined winning area in any order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be used as the transition condition. In this case, the condition may be that only the detection means has detected, or the predetermined condition that the detection means has performed a plurality of detections in a predetermined manner (the number of detections, the detection interval, etc.) may be the predetermined condition. ..

Moreover, although the detection sensor of the winning area is used as the detection means used for establishing the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 or the set value change switch 151 may be usable. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection unit that cannot be freely operated by the player during the game, such as a detection sensor in the winning area.

In addition, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and are used as detection means used to establish the transition condition, and transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, a keyboard may be provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and it can be used as a detecting means used to establish the transition condition, and the transition condition can be established by the password input from the keyboard. ..

Further, only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value changing state by monitoring the establishment of the transition condition, but the power of the gaming machine is turned on. At times, even if the set value change switch 151 is not turned on, it may be possible to monitor the establishment of the transition condition and shift to the probability set value change state. In this case, the period for always monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be set based on the power-on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition may be set when the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power-on. It is also possible to start the period for monitoring the establishment of.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to a player The detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, big winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned. , A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) The setting means enables the probability setting value to be selected when the detection means detects a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means performs the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. Further, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously perform the probability setting value changing operation is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value changing operation can be performed simultaneously by a plurality of gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

In addition, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value is used in a game. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, big winning opening switch 38a), and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned, Setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) The setting means is configured to enable selection of the probability setting value when a plurality of detecting means detect a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means performs the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. Further, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously perform the probability setting value changing operation is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value changing operation can be performed simultaneously by a plurality of gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

The setting means enables the probability setting value to be selected when the detection means detects the predetermined mode in a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

In addition, the plurality of detection means cannot be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability setting value is changed by the setting value changing operation unit configured by the DIP switch.

The DIP switch that constitutes the set value changing operation unit is provided at a position that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and the input state thereof is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as the set value change operation unit, and the state of the DIP switch corresponding to each probability set value is defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value changing process shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability set value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, it is determined whether the state of the setting value changing operation unit has changed (step S461), and if it has changed (step S461), the value of the work probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). As a result, the desired probability setting value can be set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Becomes

By using the DIP switch in this manner, the work of setting a desired probability setting value becomes easy, and the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance, the probability setting value display device 153 may be omitted. Further, a cover for covering the dip switch may be attachable so that the state of the dip switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Further, in order to make it easy to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch and lighted when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be constantly turned on, or may be turned on only in the probability set value changing state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, the set value changing operation unit is not limited to the DIP switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary type switch, as long as it is possible to grasp the probability set value by visually observing the state of each switch. Anything is fine.

Further, the probability setting value changing state is set according to the state of the setting key switch 152, but it is possible to shift to the probability setting value changing state according to the state of the setting value changing switch 151 as in the third modified example described above, and the predetermined time The probability setting value change state may be terminated after the passage of. In this case, the probability setting value may be set based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

Further, when the probability setting value change state is not set, the currently set probability setting value is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be always performed when the probability setting value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure variation display game is started. Alternatively, it may be periodically performed at regular intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, it may be notified that an abnormality has occurred, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example is configured so that the game cannot be played when the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A for making the probability setting value changeable is disconnected. ..

In this modification, a setting sub-board is provided which is a setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, etc., and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It is like this. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154. Note that the setting value change switch 151 is not shown here.

FIG. 43A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed so that the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, and it is recognized that the input from the setting key switch 152 is off. Based on this, the probability setting value change state is prevented and the game is allowed to proceed. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, an LED serving as a confirmation means that allows the state of the setting key switch 152 to be visually recognized is provided. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the off state.

FIG. 43B shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is open, and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, and it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the probability setting value change state is set on condition that the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 forms the specific operation information that is input when the operation unit is operated to be in the specific state, and based on the input of this specific operation information. The state is changed to the probability setting value in which the probability setting value can be selected. In this probability setting value changing state, the game is not allowed to proceed, and by ending the probability setting value changing state, the game can proceed.

43C shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43D shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. In either case, the input to the CPU 111A is set to HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

That is, since the state becomes the same as when the probability setting value is changeable, the specific operation information is input also in this case. As a result, the probability setting value is changed and the game cannot be progressed. In this way, the specific operation information is input even in the case of disconnection or disconnection of the connector, so that it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the case of abnormality. Further, since the confirmation means is in a lighted state even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Here, the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 is described, but they may be directly connected without the connector 154. Further, although the setting sub-board that constitutes the setting means including the setting key switch 152 and the like is provided separately from the game control device 100, the setting key switch 152 and the like are provided in the game control device 100 and the setting means. May be integrated with the game control device 100, and in this case as well, it is possible to detect disconnection between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A and disconnection of the connector with the same configuration.

Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is lost, but the specific operation is performed when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is lost. Information may be input. Alternatively, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 and the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output the specific operation information.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player A control unit (game control device 100) for controlling and a probability setting value, which is connected to the control unit and to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, is set in the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting unit (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating a value change button (set value change switch 151)), and is operated so that the operation unit enters a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability setting value can be selected, and the control means does not advance the game in the state where the specific operation information is input. When the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, the specific operation information is input to the control means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

Further, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The game machine of this modification is different in the transition condition to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In the present modification, the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability set value confirmation processing, when the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability set value confirmation processing ends. When the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434), and when it is not in the on state (step S434; N), the off state confirmation flag is set. (Step S473), the probability setting value confirmation processing is ended. The off-state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch was in the off state when the game was not in progress.

Then, when the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471). If there is an off-state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472), the processes from step S435 are performed, and the process proceeds to the probability set value confirmation mode. On the other hand, if there is no off-state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. That is, when the setting key switch is in the on state during the game and is not in the game state, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not shifted, and the setting key switch is in the off state in the non-game state. When the state changes to the on state, the mode is changed to the probability set value confirmation mode.

In this way, by not switching to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch is still in the on state during the game, it is not possible to switch to the probability setting value confirmation mode. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed by switching to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the player is not in the game (state not in prohibition state) after that, when the setting key switch is turned on without doing so. .. That is, the probability setting value can be confirmed only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability setting value.

From the above, the setting unit (game control device 100) is operated by the control unit (game control device 100) when the game state is not in the prohibited state (operation key (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152))). The confirmation state is set only when the state is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[Seventh Modification]
Next, a seventh modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example is provided with a RAM clear button as a third operation unit in addition to a setting key operation unit forming the first operation unit and a set value change button forming the second operation unit. A signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100. The RAM clear button, like the setting key operation unit and the set value change button, cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this main process, if the RAM clear switch is in the on state (the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y), the process proceeds to step S41. That is, the RAM clear switch serves as an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Further, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 46 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, if there is an input from the RAM clear switch (is in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the process from step S412 is executed to confirm the selected probability setting value. To do.

In this way, the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the RAM clear button is pressed down, and the probability setting value can be confirmed by the RAM clear button. It is possible to selectively perform the work of determining the probability setting value using the minimum operation unit, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game shop. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

When the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed and the RAM is initialized, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed. Since it is possible to perform only the initialization of the RAM without shifting to the state, it may be necessary to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability setting value change state when only the initialization of the RAM is desired. Without, it is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game store.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) has a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch). )) a predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) is operated, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, storage means (RAM111C) ) Can be initialized. By operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability setting value can be confirmed.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to the player. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are the first operation section (setting key operation section (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation section (setting value). Setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change button (setting value change switch 151)) and the third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), and setting A storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game by the control means including the information of the probability set value selected by the means, the front of the gaming machine 10, and the closed state and the open state. It is provided with a convertible main body frame (front frame 12) and an open/close detection means (game control device 100) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the main body frame, and the control means detects that the main body frame is in the open state. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while being detected by the first operation unit, the probability setting value is changed and the storage means is initialized. When the opening and closing detection means detects that the frame is in the open state, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the third operation portion is operated, the probability setting value is not changed. This means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform the operation of changing the probability setting value when only the initialization of the RAM is desired, and the work efficiency in the game shop can be improved.

Further, the control means detects that the main body frame is in the open state by the opening/closing detection means, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation portion and the third operation portion are operated, The probability setting value can be changed and the storage means is initialized so that the opening/closing detection means detects that the main body frame is closed, and the first operation part and the third operation part are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in this state, the storage means is initialized without changing the probability setting value. Therefore, even if the first operation part and the third operation part are operated at the same time, it is possible to shift to the probability set value changing state, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game shop. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operating portion is operated, the probability setting value change state is not entered, and thus fraudulent acts can be prevented.

In FIG. 45, the state of the setting key switch is set prior to the confirmation of the state of the RAM clear switch so that the probability setting value change state is entered even when the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are operated at the same time. However, the condition that the setting key switch is in the ON state and the RAM clear switch is in the ON state may be used as the transition condition to the probability setting value changing state. By making the operation of a plurality of operation units a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention to shift to the probability set value changing state.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine of the first embodiment which is not provided with the RAM clear button, the open/closed detection means detects that the main body frame is in the open state, and the set key operation part and the set value change button are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the probability setting value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and the opening/closing detection means detects that the main body frame is closed, and When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key operation unit and the set value change button are operated, the storage means is initialized without changing the probability set value. It can be said that In this case as well, the condition that the setting key switch is on and the setting value change switch is on may be the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit. Further, the setting means can determine the selected probability setting value by operating the third operation unit.

Note that the functions of the probability value changing switch and the RAM clear switch may be replaced with each other in FIG. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing from step S407 is performed, the probability setting value to be selected is changed, and when there is an input from the setting value change switch, the processing from step S412 is performed. Alternatively, the process of confirming the selected probability setting value may be performed.

[Eighth Modification]
Next, an eighth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The game machine of this modification is different in the probability setting value determination operation.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In this modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 47 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, when the setting value changing switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the processes from step S407 are performed to change the selected probability setting value. Further, when the setting value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processing from step S412 is performed, and the processing to determine the selected probability setting value is performed.

The first input mode here is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within less than a predetermined time, and there is the first input mode when the pressing is completed. I try to judge. That is, the probability setting value is changed when the pressing operation is performed for a short time and the setting value changing button is released (when the setting value changing switch 151 is turned off). The reason why the set value change button is released is to prevent the probability set value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is terminated for a predetermined time or more, and there is the second input mode when the specified time elapses. I try to judge. That is, the probability setting value is fixed when the pressing operation is performed for a long time exceeding the specified time (when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or longer).

In this way, the probability setting value can be selected and confirmed by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the setting value change button is pressed. The operations of changing and confirming the set value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game shop can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced. It should be noted that the first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-described operations, and may be any operations as long as they can be discriminated from each other.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100), the predetermined operation unit of the plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) When the power of the game machine is turned on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM111C) can be initialized, and the selected probability setting value can be confirmed by operating the predetermined operation unit. Will be.

[Ninth Modification]
Next, a ninth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The game machine of this modification is different in the transition condition to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 48 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation processing, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing is terminated and the probability setting value confirmation mode is not shifted.

The predetermined abnormality can be set arbitrarily, but here, it is illegal magnets, illegal board radio waves, illegal frame radio waves, illegal general electricity, and special winning opening. When any of these abnormalities is occurring, it is determined that the predetermined abnormality is occurring. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by fraudulent acts, and if such abnormalities occur, the probability setting value is known to the person who conducts the fraudulent activity by not switching to the probability setting value confirmation mode. It is possible to prevent that.

Further, the switch abnormality, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the payout abnormality error, and the glass frame opening error due to the occurrence of the connector disconnection or the like are not included in the predetermined abnormality, but may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key operation unit and the set value change button are operated, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside so that the gaming shop side is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known before the staff member confirms the occurrence of the abnormality.

It should be noted that this security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or the probability setting value confirmation mode is started to prompt confirmation of the gaming machine. A device external to the gaming machine can recognize that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the security signal being output for a predetermined time.

In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the setting key switch is not switched to the probability set value confirmation mode.However, when the predetermined abnormality occurs, the setting key switch is turned on. If all of the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the ON state is kept, the probability set value confirmation mode is entered from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Also, by applying the configuration of the sixth modification described above, the probability setting value confirmation mode is entered only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state in the state where a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You can In this case, when the game is being played (step S433; Y) and the predetermined abnormality is being generated (step S501; Y), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared.

In this way, it is impossible to switch to the probability set value confirmation mode by not switching to the probability set value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains in the ON state from the state where the predetermined abnormality has occurred. If the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on in the state where a predetermined abnormality that is a state has occurred, then all the predetermined abnormalities are cleared (states that are not prohibited states), and the probability set value It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed after shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, the probability setting value can be confirmed only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability setting value.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value). And a setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the setting means is based on the operation portion being operated to a predetermined state. , The probability setting value can be confirmed, and the game state controlled by the control means is in a state where a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the operation section is in a predetermined state. However, it means that the confirmation state is not set. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to the probability setting value being shown.

Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormality, the control means can output information to the outside of the gaming machine, and if any of the predetermined abnormality has occurred, the predetermined abnormality is detected. It means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all are eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and also to the outside that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed, and the probability setting value is indicated. This can prevent inconveniences.

Further, it is provided with a storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game, and the control means, when the storage means is initialized and when the confirmation state is started, provides the specific external information for a predetermined period. It is supposed to output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

Further, the setting means, when the operation unit is set to a predetermined state in the state where the predetermined abnormality has occurred and all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the predetermined state is maintained, all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved. Based on this, the confirmation state is set. Therefore, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the predetermined abnormality does not occur, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

In addition, the setting means sets the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state while the predetermined abnormality is not occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[Tenth Modification]
Next, a tenth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 49 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation processing, when the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not a game is being performed (step S511). When not playing the game (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

On the other hand, when the game is in progress (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. As a result, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode even during the game, and the game is suspended during the probability setting value confirmation mode.

Further, after performing the processing of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. Further, if there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, game restart is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability setting value is set. The confirmation process ends. As a result, the game that has been interrupted with the end of the probability set value confirmation mode will be restarted.

In the state where the game is suspended, the display on the collective display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the suspension may be continued. Further, when the game is interrupted during the variable display of the special figure variable display game or the normal figure variable display game, the variable display on the collective display device 50 may be continued. Further, the collective display device 50 may display a display indicating that it is in an interrupted state.

In addition, when the game is interrupted, an interruption command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is restarted, a restart command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, so that the display device 41, voice, LED, etc. The effect corresponding to the interruption may be performed by the light emitting member or the movable accessory. Further, the display and the like on the display device 41 when the game is restarted may be the same as the display and the like on the display device 41 when the power is restored.

Further, even when the game is interrupted, the winnings to the starting winning port 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning port 35 and the special variation winning device 38 may be valid or invalid. Further, the payout of the game balls may be continued even during the interruption of the game.

[Eleventh Modification]
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification outputs the sound accompanying the change of the probability setting value.

FIG. 50A shows an example in which the probability setting value is changed. When the power of the gaming machine is in the off state, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position to set the setting key switch to the on state (t11), and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in this state, the setting is performed. The value is changed (t12). Based on the setting value change state, the game control device 100 transmits a command of which the probability setting is being changed to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 informs that the probability setting value is being changed based on the reception of this command. Output the change notification sound. Although any voice may be used as the change notification voice, for example, a voice "probability setting value is being changed", a specific music or an alarm sound may be used. Further, the probability setting value change state is also notified by the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44. Is also good. For example, the display device 41 may display "Probability setting value is being changed". That is, the production device used in the game is used to notify that the probability setting value is being changed. By making a notification using the production device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value is being changed, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the salesclerk of the game store and the surrounding This can be noticed by the player and can prevent illegal games from being played.

Then, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position so that the setting key switch is turned off, the probability setting value changing state ends (t13). Based on the end of the set value change state, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting change end command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 sets for a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) based on the reception of this command. A probability setting value notification voice for notifying the information of the set probability setting value is output (t13 to t14). After that, the sound output according to the state of the game is performed (t14).

Any sound may be used as the probability setting value notification sound, but as shown in FIG. 50B, for example, a sound corresponding to the set probability setting value is output. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the sound "probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, other sound may be used, or specific music or alarm sound may be used. Further, the display device 41 also performs display according to the similarly set probability setting value. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the display "probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, other displays may be used.

In addition to this, the probability setting value is informed that the display of the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 correspond to the set probability setting value. You may do it. That is, the probability setting value is informed using the effect device used in the game. In this way, by using the effect device to notify, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the salesclerk of the amusement store and the surrounding games. This can be noticed by a person, and an illegal game can be prevented from being played.

When the probability setting value is changed, external information indicating that the probability setting value is changed is output so that the external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize that the probability setting value is changed. Is also good. Also, in the probability setting value confirmation mode, similarly, external information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode is output is output so that the external device (such as a hall computer) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be graspable. By doing so, it is possible for the amusement store side to immediately understand the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, and prevent fraudulent activity.

Further, the game may not be allowed to proceed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability setting value change state. Further, the probability setting value notification voice may be output for a period in which the game cannot proceed. By doing so, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be immediately played, and it is possible to prevent the game from being illegally advanced. Further, when the probability set value confirmation mode is set, it is determined that the probability set value confirmation mode is the speaker 19a, 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, the board effect device. You may make it notify by production devices, such as 44.

Also, each time the probability setting value is updated by an operation in the probability setting value changing state, a sound corresponding to the updated probability setting value may be output. Further, other production devices may similarly notify the updated probability set value in response to the update of the probability set value. Thereby, the selected probability setting value can be easily confirmed.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to the player Control means for performing control (game control device 100) and setting means for making it possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (game control). Device 100) and an effect device (speakers 19a, 19b, display device 41, sub information display device 90, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, board effect device 44) for performing a game effect, and selected. The probability setting value can be reported by the production device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity. In addition, the production device can notify that the probability setting value can be changed. In addition, the production device can notify that the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In addition, after the probability setting value change state ends, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the game cannot be immediately played, and it is possible to prevent the game from being illegally advanced.

As described above, in the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hitting gaming state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening/closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b, for example, and the big winning. Control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the mouth. Then, until a condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the big winning opening is achieved. Opening is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, during the special game state (big hit game state) or during the small hit game state, a predetermined number of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. A round game in which the special winning opening is opened is executed a predetermined number of times until such a condition is achieved.
51 to 61 show flowcharts for explaining processing for generating the special game state and the small hit game state.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
Details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-described special drawing game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 51, in the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the special winning opening opening processing is being performed (step A201). ..
When the special winning opening opening process is being performed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the special winning opening opening process is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step S201). A202).

When the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A202; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, whether the small hitting processing is being performed (step A203). ..
If processing is being performed during the small hit (step A203; Y), the processing shifts to step A205. If the small hitting mid-sized processing is not being performed (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, whether the small hitting residual ball processing is being performed (step A204).
Since the special figure game process number does not shift until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number in this way.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing ends. When the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.
At step A205, the winning counter is set to "0" (step A205). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one of the two special winning opening switches 38a) (step A206).

If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other of the two special winning opening switches 38a) (step A210). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), and effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed. Then, the prize counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other of the two special winning opening switches 38a) (step A210).

When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211) and effect command setting processing (step A212) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A213), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

When the value of the winning prize counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the value of the winning prize counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A215).
When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated, and when the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing It is determined whether it is in progress (step A216).
When the small hit remaining balls are being processed (step A216; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and when the small hit remaining balls are not being processed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is the big winning. It is added to the mouth count number (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the big winning mouth count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "10") (step A218).

When the special winning opening count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( (Step A220), it is determined whether or not a small hit is being processed (step A221).
When not being processed during the small hit (step A221; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when being processed during small hit (step A221; Y), the small winning opening control pointer area is hit small. The value of the end of the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. This closes the special winning opening and ends the first round.

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
Next, details of the fanfare/during-interval processing (step A11) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 52, in the fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). , Production command setting processing (step A903) is performed.

Next, the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), the open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special game state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), the special winning opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for short opening (second opening mode) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A907), the process proceeds to step A909. If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the special winning opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. It is saved (step A908), and the process proceeds to step A909.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the special winning opening opening information indicating the big hit pattern, the special winning opening opening information 1 (4R: all short opening), the big winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long opening), big winning Mouth opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening), special winning opening information 4 (4R: all long opening), big winning opening information 5 (16R: all long opening), Special winning opening information 6 (16R: 1 to 8R is long opening, 9 to 16R is short opening), special winning opening opening information 7 (16R: 1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening) is set. ing.
Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value "0", the special winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value "16", the big winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16”. The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. A long opening operation is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, and a short opening operation is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.

In step A909, the process number is set to "4", which is related to the special winning opening opening process (step A909). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A910).
Next, a signal relating to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A911), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information in the winning hole count number area is cleared (step A912). After that, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A913), and the processing during the fanfare/interval ends.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 53, in the special winning opening opening process, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value region of the RWM to determine the current round. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001).

If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), the open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the special game state is set. It is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005), An interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1011. If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S1004). A1006), an interval command is prepared (step A1007), effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1011.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the special game state ends. An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at that time is prepared (step A1009), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1011.

In step A1011, the process number is set to "5" for the special winning opening remaining ball process (step A1011). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1012). After that, in order to close the opening/closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, OFF data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1013), and the big winning opening is opened. Medium processing ends.

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) in the above special figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 54, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of the RWM to determine the current round. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

When the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step A1101; N), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired. (Step A1103), a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the obtained open switching determination value (step A1105), and when the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109. Process shifts to. If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening release information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect of notifying that the subsequent round will be a short open round. Specifically, as the special winning opening opening information indicating the big hit pattern, the special winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long open) and the special winning opening opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R long opening, 5 to 16R: When any one of (short open) is selected, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and the round continuation notification effect is executed at the 4th round. If the selected special winning opening opening information is the big winning opening opening information 2, it is informed that the long opening will continue in the round continuation notification production, and the big winning opening is opened with the long opening in the rounds after the 5th round. It Further, if the selected special winning opening opening information is the big winning opening opening information 3, it is notified that the rank down effect is performed in the round continuation notification effect and the opening is short, and the big winning is performed in the fifth round and thereafter. The mouth is opened with a short opening.

When the special winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank-down performance system (step A1106; N), the processing moves to step A1109. Further, when the special winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process moves to step A1109. Further, when the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, the interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step S1107). A1108) and the process proceeds to step A1109. Note that the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types such as 2R, 4R, and 8R may be provided.

At step A1109, the interval time set at step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109). After that, the processing number “3” that is related to the fanfare/interval processing is set (step A1110), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1111), and the special winning opening (special variation winning device) is set. The signal regarding the end of opening (38) (for example, the signal during operation of the special electric auditors product 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1112), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1101; Y). A1113), the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information and the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1114), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. It is saved (step A1115).

Next, "6" is set as the process number related to the big hit ending process (step A1116), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1117), and the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is set. The signal related to the end of opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 in-operation signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1118).
Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1119), and the information of the round number area that stores the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1120). , The information of the round number upper limit value area that stores the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1121). After that, the information in the round number upper limit value information area that stores the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step A1122), and the special winning opening opening information area that stores the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A1123), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit ending process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 55, in the jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data set at the start of variation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is the time reduction operation data (step A1201).
When it is not time saving operation data (step A1201; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (step A1202), and when it is time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1203). ..

Next, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).
Next, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A1206), the effect remaining rotational speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotational speed in the RAM. The information is saved in the area (step A1207), the next mode transfer information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the information is saved in the next mode transfer information area in the RWM (step A1208).

Next, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure restoration (step A1210), and effect command setting processing (step A1211) is performed. ..
Next, a performance rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining performance rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and a performance command setting process (step A1213) is performed to prepare a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number ( Step A1214) and effect command setting processing (step A1215) are performed.
Next, after the big hit, it is determined whether or not there is a time reduction (step A1216), and if there is a time reduction (step A1216; Y), the process proceeds to step A1219. If the time is not shortened (step A1216; N), the left-hand instruction command notification command is prepared (step A1217), and after performing the effect command setting process (step A1218), the process proceeds to step A1219.

In step A1219, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1219). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1220).
Then, a signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal of the big hit is turned off, 3 signals of the big hit are turned off, 4 signals of the big hit are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal related to the end of the big hit (eg, The condition device operating signal is OFF, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 per signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 per signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).
Next, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1223), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1224), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1224). Step A1225). After that, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1226), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning hole fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1227), and the jackpot ending process is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the big hit end process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 56(a), in the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal regarding no time saving (for example, two jackpot signals are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and the high probability & time saving is performed. No start signal (eg, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, ordinary symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the universal figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is stored. The special figure high probability & no time saving flag is saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the high probability variation number area (step A1236).
Next, a signal related to a left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1237), and a display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) during right-handed operation is displayed. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1238), and the jackpot end setting process 1 ends.

Through the above processing, after the special game state ends, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state (probability change state) and the state is not the time saving state. In addition, by setting an initial value (for example, 100) in the high probability variation frequency region, the high probability state is ended by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the big hit end process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 56B, in the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1241). Since the signal related to the start of the time saving is output from the big hit, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area.
Then, a signal related to the start of high probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation time reduction State signal is ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is ON), and is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1242). ).

Next, the number with time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A1243), and the universal figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A1244). The special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1245). After that, the initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the high probability variation number area (step A1246), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended.

By the above processing, after the special game state ends, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state (probability change state) and the time saving state. Further, by setting an initial value (for example, 100) in the high probability variation frequency region, the high probability state is ended by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).
In the case of the present embodiment, the right hitting mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hitting mode is set during the special game state, the setting for right hitting is not performed in the jackpot end setting process 2.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting fanfare processing (step A15) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 57, in the small hitting fanfare medium processing, first, "8" relating to the small hitting medium processing is set as a processing number (step A1301), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1302).

Next, the opening time of the special winning opening in the small hit game (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1303), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, special electric accessory 1 The operation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1304).
Next, in order to open the opening/closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1305). After that, the information of the special winning opening count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1306), and the small hit operation initial value (for example, "0") is saved in the small hit mid-control pointer area. (Step A1307), the small hit fanfare medium processing ends.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, details of the small hit mid-process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the small hit medium processing, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and whether the loaded value is the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”) or more. Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not greater than or equal to the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting medium control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, The hitting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is greater than or equal to the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is within the special figure high probability. It is determined whether the flag is a flag (step A1406). In this way, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit in the special figure high probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time saving state is in effect.
When the loaded flag is a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to step A1409. If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1406; N), the command for the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and the effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. The process moves to step A1409.

In step A1409, "9" relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1409). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1410). After that, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1411), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1412). The hitting process is ended.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hitting movement transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-described small hitting process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 59, in the small hit operation transition setting process, a branch process (step A1421) is performed according to the control pointer (control pointer during small hit).

If the control pointer is "0", "2", or "4" in step A1421, the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1422). Off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1423), and the small hit operation transition setting process ends.
In step A1421, if the control pointer is "1", "3", or "5", the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1424), ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1425), and the small hit operation transition setting process is ended.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the opening of 200 msec and the closing of 1500 msec are alternately performed, and the control pointer during the small hit is sequentially set at the end of the opening and at the end of the closing. Will be updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hit midway control pointer is updated to "0", and At the end of the first 1500 msec closing (that is, when switching from the first 1500 msec closing to the second 200 msec opening), the control pointer during small hit is updated to "1", and the second 200 msec opening is closed. The control pointer during small hit is updated to "2" at the end, the control pointer during small hit is updated to "3" at the end of the second 1500 msec closing, and the control during small hit is finished at the end of the third 200 msec opening The pointer is updated to “4”, and the control pointer during small hit is updated to “5” at the end of the third 1500 msec closing. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec opening, the control pointer during small hit is updated to "6", and after the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 msec and the subsequent small hit ending time of 100 msec, the small hit occurs. The condition ends. Therefore, after the fourth opening of 200 msec and the closing of 2000 msec, the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit remaining ball treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 60, in the small hit remaining ball processing, first, "10" relating to the small hit end processing is set as a processing number (step A1501), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1502).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1503), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric auditor 1 working signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1504). After that, the information of the special winning opening count area is cleared (step A1505), the information of the control pointer area during the small hit is cleared (for example, 0) (step A1506), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit ending process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 61, in the small hit ending process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to a high special figure probability (step A1601). Step A1602).
If the loaded flag is a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603) and set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of setting stop symbol). The address of the table corresponding to the performance mode transition information is acquired (step A1604).

Next, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A1605) to obtain the effect remaining speed of the effect mode to be transferred, and the effect remaining speed of rotation in the RAM. The information is saved in the area (step A1606), the next mode transfer information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and saved in the next mode transfer information area in the RWM (step A1607). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1609).
If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

On the other hand, when the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1610), Perform effect command setting processing (step A1611).
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and an effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed to prepare a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number ( Step A1614) and effect command setting processing (step A1615) are performed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the mode is left-handed (step A1616; Y), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after performing the effect command setting process (step A1618), the process proceeds to step A1619. Transition.

In step A1619, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619). Then, it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag relating to special time saving (time saving state) (step A1620).
When the loaded flag is a flag related to special drawing time saving (step A1620; Y), the process proceeds to step A1623. If the loaded flag is not a flag relating to special time saving and shortening (step A1620; N), a signal relating to left-handing instruction (for example, turning off the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621), in order to turn off the indicator LED for right hitting (for example, the first gaming status display unit 57), save the number under left hitting in the gaming status display number 2 area (step A1622), and for step A1623. Move to processing.

In step A1623, “0”, which is related to the special figure normal process, is set as the process number (step A1623). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1624). After that, the signal regarding the end of the small hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1625), and the signal regarding the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1626).
Next, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1627), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1628), and the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1629). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1630), and the small hit ending process is ended.

<Over prize notification production>
The gaming machine 10 is capable of executing an over-winning notification effect for notifying the occurrence of an over-winning when an over-winning to the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) occurs during the special gaming state. Here, the case where the over-winning to the big winning opening occurs is the case where the number of game balls winning the big winning opening during one round game exceeds the winning upper limit number (for example, 10).
For example, as shown in FIG. 62, the over-winning notification effect of the present embodiment includes an over-winning notification effect of a first notification mode (first effect mode) and an over-winning notification of a second notification mode (second effect mode). There is an effect and an over-winning notification effect in the third notification mode (third effect mode).

The over-winning notification effect of the first notification mode can notify (indicate) the occurrence of an over-winning. In the present embodiment, the first notification mode includes two types, type 1 and type 2, but of course, the types of the first notification mode are not limited to two. That is, the type of the first notification mode may be one type or plural types.
The over-winning notification effect of the second notification mode can notify (indicate) the occurrence of an over-winning, and can also notify (indicate) the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a special result as a look-ahead notice. In addition, in the present embodiment, there are four types of the second notification mode, types 1 to 4, but of course, the types of the second notification mode are not limited to four types. That is, the type of the second notification mode may be one type or plural types.
The over-winning notification effect of the third notification mode can notify (indicate) the occurrence of an over-winning and also notify (indicate) the probability setting value that is currently set. In the present embodiment, there are four types of the third notification mode, types 1 to 4, but of course the types of the third notification mode are not limited to four types. That is, the type of the third notification mode may be one type or plural types.

FIG. 63 shows an example of a process related to the over-winning prize notification effect.
The effect control device 300 executes the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 and displays the result of the special figure variable display game corresponding to the decorative special figure variable display game according to the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game. indicate.
During execution of the decorative special figure variation display game, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variation display game display section 41a for displaying the decorative special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. A first standby hold display section 41b1 for displaying a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory, and a second waiting pending display for displaying a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to an undigested second starting memory In the display portion 41b2, the execution pending display portion 41c for displaying information on the starting memory during exhaustion (starting memory corresponding to the currently-executed special figure variation display game), and the decorative special figure variation display game display section 41a. A variable display portion 41d for small symbols that variably displays a small symbol that is relatively smaller than the decorative special symbol (identification information) that is variably displayed, and a number hold display portion 41e that displays the number of undigested starting memories by numbers. And are provided.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(a), when the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decoration special figure variation display game is a big hit, the effect control device 300, at the start of the special game state, The notification mode distribution table is referred to, and the notification mode of the over-prize notification effect to be executed during the special game state is determined based on the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game. Then, the type allocation table corresponding to the determined notification mode is referenced to determine the type of the notification mode.

An example of the notification mode distribution table is shown in FIG. 64A. In the notification mode distribution table, the notification mode of the over-prize notification effect is set for each result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.
Here, in the present embodiment, there are twelve types of decorative special symbols, that is, symbols 1 to 9 having a numeral portion as a symbol identifying portion and symbols A to C having a character portion as a symbol identifying portion. In the variable display game, the symbols 1 to 9 and the symbols A to C are variably displayed in a predetermined order in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a. In addition, in the special result mode (big hit result mode) of the decorative special figure variable display game, from the special result mode composed of the double stitches of the general symbol (symbols 1 to 9) and the double stitch of the special symbol (symbols A to C) There is a special result mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 64A, the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is even-numbered patterns (“2, 2, 2”, “4, 4, 4”, “6, 6, 6”, “8, 8, 8"), the first notification mode is selected as the notification mode of the over-win prize notification effect executed during the special game state based on the special result mode. If the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is the special result mode consisting of the ditches (“7, 7, 7”) of the pattern 7, the second notification mode is selected and the decorative special figure variation display game is selected. The special result that the result mode is made of odd-numbered symbols other than the symbol 7 (“1,1,1”, “3,3,3”, “5,5,5”, “9,9,9”) When it is a mode, the third notification mode is selected. Further, when the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is a special result mode consisting of double stitches of the special symbol A (symbol A), the first notification mode is selected, and the result mode of the decorative special symbol variable display game is In the case of the special result mode consisting of the double pattern of the special symbol B (pattern B), the second notification mode is selected, and the result mode of the decorative special symbol variable display game consists of the double pattern of the special symbol C (pattern C). In the case of the special result mode, the third notification mode is selected.
In the example shown in FIG. 64A, the second notification mode is the most difficult to select, but the selection rate of the notification mode is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the third notification mode<second notification. The mode may be higher in the order of <first notification mode.

When the notification mode of the over-win prize notification effect is determined to be the first notification mode, the effect control device 300 refers to the type allocation table of the first notification mode, and based on the result mode of the decoration special figure variable display game. Then, the type of the first notification mode is determined.
An example of the type allocation table in the first notification mode is shown in FIG. 64B(a). In the type allocation table of the first notification mode, the type and the corresponding type selection rate are set for each result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.
In the example shown in FIG. 64B(a), when the result mode of the decorative special map variable display game is a special result mode consisting of even-numbered patterns, the type 1 (“Wow!”) is the type 2 ( "Susuga!") is easier to select, and if the result mode of the decorative special map variation display game is a special result mode consisting of double stitches of the special symbol A, type 2 ("Susuga!") is the type. It is easier to select than 1 (“Wow!”).

Further, when the notification mode of the over-prize notification process is determined to be the second notification mode, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is an undigested start memory.
Then, when there is no starting memory that has not been digested, the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect is changed to the second notification mode, the first notification mode is determined, and the type of the first notification mode is, for example, type. 2 (“Sasuga!”) is decided.
On the other hand, if there is an undigested starting memory, the result will be a big hit in the undigested starting memory based on the prefetch result information (prefetch variable system command and prefetch symbol system command) from the game control device 100. It is determined whether or not there is a starting memory (a starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit).

Then, if there is no starting memory that results in a big hit in the undigested starting memory, the reach system corresponding to the undigested starting memory is acquired based on the prefetch result information from the game control device 100. When there are a plurality of undigested starting memories, for example, the reach line with the highest expectation among them is acquired. After that, the type allocation table of the second notification mode for disengagement is referred to, and the type of the second notification mode is determined based on the acquired reach system.
On the other hand, when there is a starting memory that results in a big hit in the undigested starting memory, based on the look-ahead result information from the game control device 100, the reach corresponding to the undigested starting memory that results in a big hit. Get the lineage. When there are a plurality of undigested starting memories that result in a big hit, for example, the reach line with the highest expectation among them is acquired. Then, the type allocation table of the second notification mode for the big hit is referred to, and the type of the second notification mode is determined based on the obtained reach system.

FIG. 64B(b) shows an example of the type allocation table of the second notification mode for out-of-range, and FIG. 64B(c) shows an example of the type allocation table of the second notification mode for big hit. In the type allocation table of the second notification mode, the type and the corresponding type selection rate are set for each reach system. In the examples shown in FIGS. 64B(b) and 64B(c), the higher the expectation of the reach system, the easier the selection of the type having the higher expectation.
The type 4 of the second notification mode (“Congratulations!”) is selected only when there is a starting memory that results in a big hit among the undigested starting memories, and therefore over-winning in the type 4 of the second notification mode By executing the notification effect, it is possible to notify the occurrence of an over-winning prize and definitely suggest that there is a starting memory that results in a big hit among the undigested starting memories (see FIG. 62).

Further, when the notification mode of the over-winning prize notification effect is determined to be the third notification mode, the effect control device 300 acquires the currently set probability setting value.
The effect control device 300, for example, based on the command (see step S421 in FIG. 11) for ending the probability setting change transmitted from the game control device 100, information (currently set) stored in the storage means (FeRAM 323 or the like). Is set to update the probability setting value). Therefore, production control device 300 can obtain the probability setting value currently set from the storage means. After that, the type allocation table of the third notification mode is referred to, and the type of the third notification mode is determined based on the acquired probability setting value.
An example of the type allocation table of the third notification mode is shown in FIG. 64B(d). In the type allocation table of the third notification mode, the type and the corresponding type selection rate are set for each probability set value.
Since the type 4 (“Congratulations!”) of the third notification mode is selected only when the probability setting value is “6”, by performing the over-prize notification production in the type 4 of the third notification mode, It is possible to notify the occurrence of over-winning and to definitely indicate that the probability setting value is "6" (see FIG. 62).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not an over-winning has occurred in the special winning opening.
The effect control device 300, for example, based on the round command (see step A902 in FIG. 52) transmitted from the game control device 100, the information stored in the storage means (FeRAM323, etc.) (the special winning opening count number). While clearing 0, based on the special winning hole count command (see steps A207 and A211 in FIG. 51) transmitted from the game control device 100, information (big winning hole count number) stored in the storage means (FeRAM 323 or the like) ) Is updated by +1. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can determine whether or not an over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred, based on the information stored in the storage means.
Alternatively, when the game control device 100 determines in the special winning opening switch monitoring process (FIG. 51) that the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count number reaches the upper limit value. It is determined whether or not it exceeds, and when it is determined that it exceeds, it sends a command to the effect control device 300 to inform that the over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred, and the effect control device 300 determines the large amount based on this command. It is also possible to configure so that it is determined that an over-winning of the winning opening has occurred.

Then, when it is determined that the over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred, the effect control device 300 uses at least one of the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b as shown in FIG. 63(b), for example. , An over-winning notification effect of the notification mode and type determined at the start of the special game state is executed.
In the example shown in FIG. 63, the notification mode of the over-winning notification performance is determined to be the second notification mode, and the over-winning notification performance is executed when the type of the second notification mode is determined to be type 3. ing. That is, the over-winning prize notification effect is executed in the type 3 of the second notification mode, the dialogue image "Exciting heat!" is displayed on the display device 41, and the sound "Exciting heat!" is output to the speaker 19a. , 19b. As a result, it is possible to notify the occurrence of over-winning and to suggest that the jackpot expectation is high (see FIG. 62).

Here, as shown in FIG. 62, the same over-win prize notification effect is executed when the type 4 of the second notification mode is selected and when the type 4 of the third notification mode is selected (that is, A dialogue image "Congratulations!" is displayed on the display device 41, and a voice "Congratulations!" is output from the speakers 19a and 19b). As a result, the player cannot know whether the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect is the second notification mode or the third notification mode when executing the over-winning notification effect, but even if the game is continued (that is, If the big hit does not occur (even if all the starting memory that has not been digested at the time of execution of the over-prize notification production) is not hit, it is the third notification mode (that is, the probability setting value is “6”) It is possible to grasp, and the expectation of the subsequent game is improved.

It should be noted that it is possible to configure the occurrence of over-winning to be involved in a specific effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(c), when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs during the special game state, after the special game state is finished, the display of the decorative special figure starting memory display is displayed. It is also possible to execute a pending change effect that changes (modifies) the mode and notifies (indicates) the prefetch result. Further, "involve the occurrence of over-winning in a specific effect" is not limited to "when the over-winning occurs in the special gaming state, execute the pending change effect after the special gaming state" is changed as appropriate It is possible, for example, “when the over-winning occurs during the special game state, the production mode of the production (round production, interval production, ending production, round continuation notification production, etc.) executed during the special gaming state is changed. May be allowed.

Moreover, the effect control device 300 counts the number of times the over-winning to the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) has occurred since the start of the special game state, and the final round game in the special game state. During the round effect corresponding to, the over-win prize evaluation effect for evaluating the number of over-win prizes generated in the special game state may be executed.
In the over-prize evaluation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the over-win prize evaluation effect of the first evaluation mode (first effect mode) and the over-win prize evaluation effect of the second evaluation mode (second effect mode). And the over-winning prize evaluation effect of the third evaluation mode (third effect mode).

In the over-prize evaluation effect of the first evaluation mode, it is possible to notify (indicate) the number of times of occurrence of over-winning in the special game state being executed, that is, the number of times of execution of over-winning notification effect. In the example shown in FIG. 65(a), the first evaluation mode has two types, type 1 and type 2, but of course, the types of the first evaluation mode are not limited to two types. That is, the type of the first evaluation mode may be one type or plural types.
The over-prize evaluation effect of the second evaluation mode notifies (indicates) the number of occurrences of over-prize in the special game state being executed, and also notifies the expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a special result as a look-ahead notice. You can (suggest). In the example shown in FIG. 65(a), there are four types of types 1 to 4 in the second evaluation mode, but of course, the types of the second evaluation mode are not limited to four types. That is, the type of the second evaluation mode may be one type or plural types.
In the over-prize evaluation effect of the third evaluation mode, the number of occurrences of over-winning in the special game state being executed can be informed (indicated), and the probability setting value currently set can be informed (indicated). In the example shown in FIG. 65(a), there are four types of types 1 to 4 in the third evaluation mode, but it goes without saying that the types of the third evaluation mode are not limited to four types. That is, the type of the third evaluation mode may be one type or a plurality of types.

For example, as shown in FIG. 65(b), in the over-prize evaluation effect of the first evaluation mode, a character image (for example, "the number of over-winning rounds was ◯!") that notifies the number of occurrences of over-winning is displayed on the display device. 41 is displayed. The display mode of the character image is different between type 1 and type 2 of the first evaluation mode.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 65C, in the over-prize evaluation production of the second evaluation mode, the character image of the number of occurrences of over-prize and the character image of the character A are displayed on the display device 41. The display mode of the character image is different between the types 1 to 4 of the second evaluation mode.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(d), in the over-prize evaluation production of the third evaluation mode, a character image notifying the number of occurrences of over-prize and a character image of the character B are displayed on the display device 41. The display mode of the character image is different between the types 1 to 4 of the third evaluation mode.

When the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decorative special figure variation display game is a big hit, the effect control device 300, at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the special game state), the evaluation mode distribution table ( (Not shown), the evaluation mode of the over-prize evaluation effect executed during the special game state is determined based on a predetermined condition (for example, a result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game).
After that, when the evaluation mode of the over-prize evaluation production is determined to be the first evaluation mode, the production control device 300 refers to the type allocation table (not shown) of the first evaluation mode, and determines the predetermined condition (for example, the decoration). The type of the first evaluation mode is determined based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game).

Moreover, when the evaluation mode of the over-winning prize evaluation effect is determined to be the second evaluation mode, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is an undigested starting memory.
Then, when there is no undigested starting memory, the evaluation mode of the over-prize evaluation effect is changed to the second evaluation, the first evaluation mode is determined, and the type of the first evaluation mode is, for example, type 2. To decide.
On the other hand, if there is an undigested starting memory, the result will be a big hit in the undigested starting memory based on the prefetch result information (prefetch variable system command and prefetch symbol system command) from the game control device 100. It is determined whether or not there is a starting memory.

Then, when there is no starting memory that results in a big hit in the undigested starting memory, the type allocation table (not shown) of the second evaluation mode for deviating is referred to, and a predetermined condition (for example, undigested The type of the second evaluation mode is determined based on the reach system corresponding to the starting memory of FIG.
On the other hand, when there is a starting memory that results in a big hit among the undigested starting memories, the type allocation table (not shown) of the second evaluation mode for the big hit is referred to, and a predetermined condition (for example, undigested). The type of the second evaluation mode is determined based on the reach system corresponding to the starting memory).

Further, when the evaluation mode of the over-winning prize evaluation production is determined to be the third evaluation mode, the production control device 300 refers to the type allocation table (not shown) of the third evaluation mode, and the currently set probability. The type of the third evaluation mode is determined based on the set value.
After that, the production control device 300 uses the display device 41 during the execution of the round production corresponding to the round game of the final round, and the evaluation mode and type determined at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the special gaming state). Execute the over-winning evaluation effect of.

Here, the entire character image may be displayed in a display mode according to the determined type, or only a part of the character image (for example, a number part) may be displayed in a display mode according to the determined type. Is also good. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 65(a), when the type A of the first evaluation mode is selected and the number of over-winning rounds is five, the words "the number of over-winning rounds was five!" Each character that makes up the row may be displayed in white, or only "5" of the characters that make up the character string "Over winning round was 5 times!" is displayed in white, and other than that May be displayed in "other colors". The "other color" is preferably a color that does not correspond to each type of evaluation mode, such as black (a color other than white, blue, green, and red in the example shown in FIG. 65A). For example, when displaying only the number part of the character image in a display mode according to the determined type, the number part indicating the number of over-wins (or the number of times the over-winning notification effect is executed) is different from other characters. Since they are displayed in different display modes, attention can be paid to the number portion (that is, the portion showing the information that the player wants to know most in the character image). Further, the display mode of the number portion can suggest the jackpot expectation degree and the probability setting, so that the interest for the over-winning prize is improved.

The display mode according to the type is not only the color, but also the transparency, the font, the angle (identical, italic, etc.), whether it can be recognized as 3D with the naked eye, the movement of the character (whether it swings, whether it slides). Different speeds).
As the way of holding the data of the character image, for example, the data "The round that won the overtime was a round!" and the data "Numbers (1 to 16 etc.)" are individually held and displayed by combining them in the gaming machine. You may let it be done. The number of occurrences of over-winning prizes and the display mode are also variable, and if you have all the possible number of images with letters and numbers set as data, the data capacity will be large, but by having them individually you can flexibly respond, It requires less data capacity.

Further, the timing for determining the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect is not limited to the start of the special game state and can be changed as appropriate, for example, may be at the start of each round game, or when the over-winning occurs. May be
Further, the timing for determining the type of the notification mode is not limited to the start of the special game state and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the start of each round game or the occurrence of an over-winning. Is also good.
Further, the timing of determining the notification mode of the over-winning notification performance and the timing of determining the type of the notification mode do not have to be the same. That is, the notification mode of the over-prize notification performance may be determined at the start of the special game state, and then the notification mode type may be determined at the start of each round game.

Further, the special result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game and the notification mode of the over-prize notification production may not correspond at 1:1. That is, the first to third notification modes can be selected regardless of the special result mode of the decoration special map change display game, and the selection rates of the first to third notification modes can be selected according to the special result modes of the decoration special map change display game. May be different. Specifically, for example, when the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is a special result mode composed of even-numbered ditches, the first to third notification modes can be selected, and among them, 1 notification mode is the most easily selected, and when the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is a special result mode consisting of double stitches of the design 7, the first to third notification modes can be selected, among which In the case where the second notification mode is the most easily selected, and the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is the special result mode including the odd-numbered symbols other than the pattern 7, the first to third notification modes are selected. It is possible, and if the third notification mode is the most easily selected, and the result mode of the decorative special map variation display game is a special result mode consisting of double stitches of the special symbol A, the first to third notifications are possible. It is possible to select a mode, the first notification mode is most easily selected from among them, and if the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special result mode consisting of double stitches of the special symbol B, When the third notification mode can be selected, the second notification mode is most easily selected, and when the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is the special result mode including the special pattern C, The first to third notification modes can be selected, and the third notification mode may be selected most easily.

In addition, the information used for allocating the notification mode of the over-prize notification production is not limited to the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the reach system corresponding to the undigested starting memory. Alternatively, the result may be the result of the special figure variation display game based on the undigested starting memory.
Further, the information used for allocating the type of the first notification mode is not limited to the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the reach system corresponding to undigested starting memory. The result may be the result of the special figure variation display game based on the undigested starting memory.
Further, the information used for sorting the type of the second notification mode is not limited to the reach system corresponding to the undigested starting memory, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special figure variation display game based on the undigested starting memory. May be the result of.

Further, in addition to (or in place of) the occurrence of an over-winning to the big winning opening, the over-winning notification effect may be executed also when an over-winning to the starting winning opening occurs. When an over-winning of the starting winning a prize occurs, the starting winning is made in a state where the number of memories of the first starting memory (starting memory corresponding to the winning of the starting winning a prize 36) is the upper limit number (for example, 4). When the game ball is won in the mouth 36, or when the number of stored second start memory (start memory corresponding to winning in the normal variable prize device 37) is the upper limit number (for example, 4), the normal variable prize device This is the case when the game ball wins 37.
In the special time saving and shortening (while supporting normal electric train), a big hit does not occur easily and there is a possibility that the game ball of the upper plate 21 will be lost and the feeling of delay and interest will be reduced. 36, by executing the over-winning notification effect when an over-winning to the normal variation winning device 37) occurs, more points can be watched and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, by executing the over-winning prize notification effect, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation level, so that the interest in the starting winning prize can be maintained.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a special result, the variable winning apparatus (special variation winning apparatus). In the gaming machine capable of converting 38) into a state in which the game balls can easily win, when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device exceeds a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, the upper limit number of winning). Is provided with a specified number breakthrough production means (production control device 300) for executing a specified number breakthrough production (over-winning prize notification production) for notifying that the specified number has been exceeded. In, it is possible to notify that the prescribed number has been exceeded, and to suggest predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, expectation of jackpot or probability set value) (see FIG. 62).
Therefore, not only can the notification that the winning number of the game balls to the variable winning device has exceeded the specified number by the specified number exceeding effect (over-winning prize notification effect), but also the predetermined information can be suggested, and thus the interest of the specified number exceeding effect can be achieved. Can be increased.

It should be noted that the method of determining whether or not the specified number has been exceeded (that is, whether or not the specified number has been exceeded) can be appropriately selected. Specifically, in the present embodiment, for example, [1] it is determined whether or not the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening exceeds the "upper limit upper limit", and it is determined that the number exceeds the "upper limit upper limit". In this case, it is possible to determine that the specified number has been exceeded (that is, execute the specified number-exceeding effect), and [2] the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening is equal to or less than the "winning upper limit number". It is also possible to judge whether or not the specified number has been exceeded (that is, execute the specified number-exceeding effect) when it is judged that it is not less than or equal to the "winning prize upper limit number", and [3] big winning opening It is determined whether or not the number of winning game balls to "the upper limit number of winnings + 1", and when it is determined that the "upper limit number of winnings + 1", it is determined that the specified number has been exceeded (that is, the specified number exceeded) [4] It is also possible to determine whether or not the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening is equal to or more than "the upper limit number of winnings + 1", and is "more than the upper limit number of winnings + 1". If it is determined, it is possible to determine that the specified number has been exceeded (that is, execute the specified number-exceeding effect), and [5] the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening is “the upper limit number of winnings+1” It is also possible to determine whether or not it is less than, and when it is determined that it is not less than the “winning prize upper limit number+1”, it is possible to determine that the prescribed number has been exceeded (that is, the prescribed number exceeding effect is executed).

Further, the prescribed number of breakthrough effects may be executed not only during the special game state but also during the small hitting game state. When executing the prescribed number breakthrough production in the small hitting game state, the number of winning game balls to the special variation winning device 38 (big winning opening) is a prescribed number (the upper limit number of winnings, that is, the large winning opening during one round game). When the number of game balls that can be won is exceeded, a prescribed number-exceeding effect (over-winning prize notification effect) may be executed.
Further, in a gaming machine equipped with a small hit RUSH mode (a production mode because small hits occur at a high frequency), the payout number in the small hit RUSH mode is a predetermined number (a specific special game state (for example, Assumed payout amount in 4R all short open special game state) and assumption in a predetermined period of special game state (for example, 1 to 4R period in special game state of all long open up to 4R and all short open after 5R) When the number of payouts or the specified number (for example, 1000) is exceeded, it is determined that the number of winning game balls to the special variation winning device 38 (the special winning opening) has exceeded the specified number, and the specified number is exceeded. May be configured to be executed. When configured in this way, it is possible to notify that more game balls have been acquired than the predetermined number by the prescribed number of breakthrough effects, and it is also possible to suggest predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, expectation of jackpot or probability setting value). Therefore, while the number of game balls acquired in the small hit RUSH mode is increasing and the interest is increasing, the interest is further raised by suggesting predetermined information, and attention is also paid to the screen, sound, and LED. You can do it and not delay.

Further, the variable winning device is not limited to the special variable winning device 38, and may be the normal variable winning device 37. When the variable prize device is the normal variable prize device 37, when the number of winning game balls to the normal variable prize device 37 in one open state of the movable member 37b exceeds a prescribed number (for example, 3), the regulation The number of breakthrough effects (over-winning prize notification effect) may be executed, and the number of memories of the second starting memory (starting memory corresponding to winning in the normal variable winning device 37) is the upper limit number (for example, 4). In the state, it may be determined that the specified number has been exceeded when the game balls have won the normal variation winning device 37, and the specified number-exceeding effect (over-winning prize notification effect) may be executed.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37) In the case of a round game, in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a special game state is executed a plurality of times when a special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is converted into a state in which a game ball is easy to win when a special result is obtained. When the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening exceeds a predetermined upper limit number (upper limit number (for example, 10)), an informing means (an effect control) for executing an over-winning informing effect informing the occurrence of an over-winning. The device 300) is provided, and the notification means is configured to notify the occurrence of an over-winning in the over-winning notification effect, and to be able to suggest predetermined information (in the present embodiment, a jackpot expectation degree or a probability set value). (See FIG. 62).
Therefore, the over-winning notification effect can not only notify the occurrence of an over-winning to the special winning opening, but can also suggest predetermined information, so that the interest of the over-winning notification effect can be enhanced.

In a specific round game (for example, a first round game, a final round game, a V round game, a probability variation promotion effect execution round game), an over-winning notification effect is not executed even if an over-winning occurs. It can also be configured as follows. Here, the "V round game" is provided with a special winning opening having a V switch for detecting a game ball flowing into a specific area and a big winning opening having no V switch, and the game ball is detected by the V switch. In this case, it is a round game in which a special winning opening having a V switch is aimed at in a gaming machine in which the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state after the special gaming state ends. Also, the "probability variation promotion effect" is an effect that determines whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state after the special game state ends, and the "probability variation promotion effect execution round game" , Is a round game in which the probability variation promotion effect is executed.

During the execution of the round game of the first round, an effect or the like for notifying what kind of big hit has occurred (whether or not a probability variation big hit has occurred, whether 16R big hit has occurred, etc.) is executed. In addition, during the execution of the final round game, an effect for notifying the number of game balls acquired during the special game state is executed. In addition, during execution of the V round game, an effect or the like for informing the player to aim at the special winning opening having the V switch is executed. Further, in the probability variation promotion effect execution round game, probability variation promotion effect or the like is executed. These effects are specific effects for notifying a game result or a matter affecting the game result, that is, a specific effect for notifying information that the player wants to know rather than an over-winning. Therefore, by configuring not to execute the over-winning notification effect during the execution of the specific round game, the over-winning notification effect and the specific effect are not executed in an overlapping manner, so the specific effect is disturbed by the over-winning notification effect. Never. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest and to surely notify the information that the player wants to know.

Also, at least in a specific round game, it is possible to execute an over-winning prize notification effect that does not interfere with the specific effect. Specifically, the effect device used for the specific effect may be different from the effect device used for the over-winning prize notification effect. That is, as a rendering device, a display device (display device 41 or the like), an audio device (speakers 19a, 19b, or the like), a light emitting device (frame decoration device 18, a panel decoration device 46, or the like), a character device (board rendering device 44, etc.). ), a vibration device (a vibrating button or woofer, etc.), a blower device (a device that blows air toward the player, etc.), and the like. For example, in a specific round game, a specific effect is produced by a display device and an audio device. It may be configured to execute and to perform the over-prize notification effect by the light emitting device and the blower. With this configuration, even if the over-winning notification effect and the specific effect are executed in a duplicated manner, the specific effect is not disturbed by the over-winning notification effect, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Further, since the specific effect can be executed together with the suggestion of the predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree and the probability setting value), the interest can be improved.

In addition, it has a big winning opening where left-handed players are more likely to win, and a big winning opening where right-handed players are more likely to win, so that the batting style can be changed during a special game state (change from left-handed to right-handed). Or change from right-handed to left-handed) In game machines, between immediately before and immediately after changing the way of striking, even if an over-winning occurs, it is configured not to execute the over-winning notification effect Is also possible.

Further, in the specific round game, only the over-prize notification effect (in the case of the present embodiment, the over-win prize notification effect of the second notification mode or the third notification mode) that also suggests the predetermined information can be executed, and other than the specific round game. In the round game, only the over-winning notification effect (in the present embodiment, the over-winning notification effect in the first notification mode) that does not suggest the predetermined information may be executable. That is, in a specific round game, it is impossible to execute an over-prize notification effect that does not suggest predetermined information, and in a round game other than a specific round game, it is impossible to execute an over-win prize notification effect that also informs (indicates) predetermined information. Is also good.
In addition, when the notification mode of the over-winning prize notification effect is determined to be the second notification mode or the third notification mode, it is easy to select type 4 as the notification mode type in the particular round game (or select only type 4). May not be done). Alternatively, conversely, in a particular round game, type 4 may not be easily selected (or type 4 may not be selected) as the notification mode type. Since the type 4 is the type with the highest degree of expectation, it can be said that the over-winning prize notification effect executed in the type 4 of the second notification mode or the type 4 of the third notification mode is an effect that attracts the attention of the player. By configuring such an over-winning notification effect (that is, an over-winning notification effect executed in type 4 of the second notification mode or type 4 of the third notification mode) not to be executed in a specific round game, You can draw attention to the round game, and the interest is improved.

In addition, when over-winning occurs continuously from the first round game to the specific round game, in the round games after the specific round game, over-winning is performed only in a specific notification mode when the over-winning occurs. You may perform notification production. Specifically, for example, when an over-winning occurs continuously from the first round game to the fifth round game (that is, five consecutive times), in the sixth to 16th round games, When the over-winning occurs, the over-winning notification effect may be executed in the second notification mode or the third notification mode (that is, the over-winning notification effect in the first notification mode may not be executed). In addition, for example, when an over-winning occurs continuously from the first round game to the fifteenth round game (that is, 15 consecutive times), an over-winning occurs in the 16th round game. At this time, the over-winning notification effect may be executed in the third notification mode (that is, the over-winning notification effect of the first notification mode or the over-winning notification effect of the second notification mode may not be executed).
In addition, when the over-winning occurs twice in a row, the over-winning notification effect may not be executed when the second over-winning occurs. As a result, the over-winning notification effects are not continuous (do not overlap), so that the over-winning notification effects that are easy to understand can be executed.

Further, either one of the condition that an over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred and the condition that the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds a prescribed number (for example, 3 in one round) is satisfied. In this case, the over-winning prize notification effect may be executed. As a result, not only the condition that an over-winning of the big winning port has occurred, but also the condition that the number of winning game balls in the general winning port 35 exceeds the specified number, the execution of the over-winning notification effect is performed. As the frequency increases, the interest will improve.
Alternatively, when both the condition that the over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred and the condition that the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds the specified number, the over-winning notification effect is executed. It may be done.
Further, the over-winning prize notification effect may be executed not only during the special game state but also during the small hitting game state.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning storage means (game control device 100) for storing a winning memory based on winning of a game ball into the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37). , When a game ball is won in the starting winning opening while the winning memory is stored in the winning storage means up to a predetermined upper limit number, a prescribed number exceeding performance (over winning award notification effect) is informed that the prescribed number has been exceeded. The predetermined number breakthrough production means (production control device 300) for executing the above is provided, and the predetermined number breakthrough production means notifies that the predetermined number has been exceeded in the predetermined number breakthrough production, and also provides predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, It can be configured to be able to suggest the jackpot expectation or probability setting value).
By configuring in this way, by the specified number breakthrough effect (over prize notification effect), it is possible not only to notify that the winning number of the game ball to the starting winning opening has exceeded the specified number, but also to be able to suggest predetermined information, It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the directed production.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning storage means (game control device 100) that stores a winning memory based on a winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37). , A notification means for executing an over-winning notification effect that notifies the occurrence of an over-winning when a game ball is won in the starting winning opening while the winning memory is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number in the winning storage means (production control The device 300) is provided, and the notification means is configured to notify the occurrence of an over-winning in the over-winning notification effect and to be able to suggest predetermined information (in the present embodiment, a jackpot expectation degree or a probability setting value). be able to.
With this configuration, the over-prize notification production can not only notify the occurrence of the over-winning to the starting winning opening, but can also suggest predetermined information, so that the interest of the over-prize notification production can be enhanced.
Note that, for example, when the decoration special figure starting memory display is shifted, the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display is changed to notify (indicate) the look-ahead result. Medium, when the effect that the player pays attention to is being executed, such as during the display of the result mode in the decorative special figure variable display game (while the symbol is stopped), the over-warning of the start winning opening is notified It may be configured not to execute the winning notification effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a setting means (game) that can set one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game (special figure variation display game) are assigned. The control device 100) is provided, and the prescribed number breakthrough production means (production control device 300) notifies the fact that the prescribed number has been exceeded without suggesting predetermined information, and a prescribed number of productions. The second performance mode (second notification mode) that indicates the expectation level (big hit expectation level) that the game result is a special result as the predetermined information, and the notification that the specified number has been exceeded In addition, it is possible to execute the prescribed number of breakthrough effects (over-winning prize notification effect) in any one of the third effect mode (third notification mode) in which the probability setting value is suggested as the predetermined information (FIG. 62). reference).
By configuring in this way, it is possible not only to notify that the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device has exceeded the specified number through the specified number of breakthrough effects (over-win prize notification effect), but also to expect the jackpot and probability setting value Since it can be suggested, it is possible to enhance the interest of the directed production.

Note that the predetermined information that can be suggested by the over-prize notification effect is not limited to the jackpot expectation of the undigested starting memory, the probability setting value that is currently set, and can be changed as appropriate. It may be the likelihood of reach occurrence or the probability of probability change transition of undigested starting memory.
In addition, the prescribed number breakthrough effect (over-winning prize notification effect) is displayed on the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, and board effect. At least one of the operations of the device 44 may be an effect for informing (suggesting) the occurrence of an over-winning prize or predetermined information. Further, when the gaming machine 10 is provided with a vibrating device or an air blowing device as an effect device, it is also possible to execute a prescribed number of breakthrough effects (over-win prize notification effect) using the vibrating device or the air blowing device. ..

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, an evaluation effect (over-winning prize evaluation effect) that evaluates the number of times the specified number of breakthrough effects (over-winning prize notification effect) have been executed (that is, the number of times over-winning has occurred) is executed. The evaluation effect means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the evaluation effect means can execute the evaluation effect during execution of a specific round game in the special game state (in the case of the present embodiment, a round game of the final round). Therefore, in the evaluation production, the number of executions can be evaluated, and predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, a big hit expectation degree or a probability set value) can be suggested (see FIG. 65).
By configuring in this way, not only the specified number breakthrough effect (over-winning prize notification effect) but also the specified number as the effect that informs that the number of winning game balls to the winning opening has exceeded the predetermined number Since it is also possible to execute an evaluation effect (over-winning prize evaluation effect) that evaluates the number of times the breakthrough effect is executed, the interest of the effect that notifies that the number of winning game balls at the winning opening has exceeded a predetermined number Can be increased.

The evaluation effect (over-prize evaluation effect) is displayed on the display device 41 or the sub-information display device 90, audio from the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. It suffices if at least one of the above operations is an effect for notifying (suggesting) the number of occurrences of over-winning prizes or predetermined information. Further, when the gaming machine 10 includes a vibrating device or an air blowing device as an effect device, it is possible to execute an evaluation effect (over-win prize evaluation effect) using the vibrating device or the air blowing device.
In addition, when an over-winning to the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37) occurs, a specified number of breakthrough effects (over-winning prize notification effect) is executed, and the specified number of times of the number of times of execution of the specified breakthrough effect in a predetermined period. You may perform the evaluation production| evaluation which evaluates (over prize winning evaluation production). In addition, when the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds a specified number (for example, three in one round), the specified number of breakthrough effects are executed, and the number of times of execution of the specified number of breakthrough effects in a predetermined period is evaluated. Evaluation performance may be executed.
Which of the prize holes to be the target of the evaluation effect (whether to make the big prize hole, the start prize hole or the general prize hole) may be changed according to the kind of the big hit and the game state.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specified number breakthrough production means (production control device 300) notifies that the specified number has been exceeded in the specified number breakthrough production, and predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, It can be configured to be able to suggest the jackpot expectation or probability setting value).
Therefore, not only can the player be informed that the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device has exceeded the specified number by the specified number of breakthrough effects (over-winning prize notification effect), but also the predetermined information can be suggested. It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the performance of notifying that the number of winning prizes has exceeded the predetermined number.
If the evaluation effect (over-winning prize evaluation effect) is configured to be executable, the prescribed number of breakthrough effects (over-winning prize notification effect) may not be able to suggest predetermined information.

<Winning number notification production>
The gaming machine 10 is capable of executing a winning number notification effect for notifying the number of gaming balls that have won a special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) during a round game. Production control device 300, during the special game state, performs a big hit mid-stage production (fanfare production, round production, interval production, and ending production). The prize number notification effect is executed in the round effect of the big hit effect.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit number of winnings (that is, the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning opening during one round game) is set to 10, but the upper limit number of winnings is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. is there.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the game control device 100 ends the display time (stop display time of special map) set in step A603 of the special figure changing process (FIG. 22). Then, the big hit fanfare time (see step A720 in FIG. 23) is set, and the fanfare command (see step A716 in FIG. 23) is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 starts the fanfare effect based on the reception of the fanfare command from the game control device 100, as shown in FIG. 66(b), for example.

Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), when the set jackpot fanfare time ends, the game control device 100 sets the first round special winning opening opening time (see steps A907 and A908 in FIG. 52). As a result, the first round game is started and a round command (see step A902 in FIG. 52) is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 starts the round effect corresponding to the first round game based on the reception of the round command from the game control device 100, as shown in FIG. 66(b), for example.

Next, as shown in, for example, FIG. 66(a), when the set special winning opening opening time is over, the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time (see steps A1005 and A1006 in FIG. 53) and sets the interval. A command (see step A1007 in FIG. 53) is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 starts the interval effect based on the reception of the interval command from the game control device 100, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(b).

Next, as shown in FIG. 66A, for example, the game control device 100 sets an interval time (see step A1109 in FIG. 54) when the set remaining ball processing time ends.
Next, when the set interval time ends, the game control device 100 sets the special winning opening opening time of the second round to start the second round game and transmits the round command to the effect control device 300. .. The effect control device 300 starts the round effect corresponding to the second round game based on the reception of the round command from the game control device 100, as shown in FIG. 66(b), for example.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the game control device 100 sets the final remaining ball processing time (see step A1008 in FIG. 53) when the special winning opening opening time of the final round ends. At the same time, an ending command (see step A1009 in FIG. 53) is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 starts the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command from the game control device 100, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(b).
Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the game control device 100 sets an ending time (see step A1115 in FIG. 54) when the set remaining ball processing time ends, and ends when the set ending time ends. , Special game state ends.

FIG. 67 shows an example of processing relating to the winning number notification effect.
67A, for example, as shown in FIG. 67A, when the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit ends, as shown in FIG. 67B, for example. , Start fanfare production.
Next, when the fanfare production is completed, the production control device 300 starts the round production corresponding to the first round game as shown in FIG. 67(c), for example. Furthermore, when the round effect is started, the winning number notification effect is started, and the winning notification images M1 are displayed in the same number as the winning upper limit number (10). As a result, the player can grasp the winning upper limit number in the round game being executed.

After that, the effect control device 300 erases the prize notification images M1 one by one each time a game ball wins the big winning opening, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 67(d) to (f). As a result, the number of deleted winning notification images M1 matches the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening in the running round game, so that the player wins the big winning opening in the running round game. It is possible to grasp the number of game balls. Then, when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs, an over-winning notification effect is executed (see FIG. 63(b)).
Next, the effect control device 300 starts the interval effect when the round effect corresponding to the first round game is completed.
Next, when the interval effect ends, the effect control device 300 starts the round effect corresponding to the second round game as shown in FIG. 67(g), and starts the winning number notification effect, The same number of winning notification images M1 as the maximum winning number is displayed. Then, each time a game ball wins the big winning opening, one winning notification image M1 is erased, and when an over-winning to the big winning opening occurs, an over-winning notification effect is executed. Production control device 300 repeats such processing until the round game of the final round is completed.

Here, since the winning number notification production is started together with the round production, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(c), when the execution time of the fanfare production is long and the fanfare production does not end even if the special winning opening opening time starts. There is a possibility that a game ball wins the big winning opening during the fanfare production, that is, before the prize number notification production is started. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the big winning opening before the start of the winning number notification effect, the large winning opening is won before the start of the winning number notification effect after the winning number notification effect starts. The winning notification images M1 of the same number as the number of playing balls are erased one by one.

Specifically, the effect control device 300, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), when the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game whose result is a big hit ends, for example, FIG. ), the fanfare production is started. Then, while the fanfare production is being executed, the game ball wins the big winning opening. Here, it is assumed that two game balls win the special winning opening while the fanfare production is being executed.
Next, when the fanfare effect is finished, the effect control device 300 starts the round effect corresponding to the first round game as shown in FIG. 68(c), and also starts the winning number notification effect, The same number of winning notification images M1 as the maximum winning number is displayed. Then, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 68(d) to (e), during the execution of the fanfare production (that is, before the start of the winning number notification production), the number of winning notification images M1 that is the same as the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening. Erase one by one. As a result, the number of the deleted winning notification images M1 matches the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening during the execution of the fanfare effect, so that the player is performing the fanfare effect (that is, the winning number notification effect (Before the start), it is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening.
Thereafter, the effect control device 300 erases the winning notification images M1 one by one each time a game ball wins the special winning opening, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 68(f) to (g). Then, when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs, an over-winning notification effect is executed (see FIG. 63(b)).

The fanfare effect may be, for example, a start notification effect that notifies the start of the special game state as shown in FIG. 67(b), or an effect button 25 (touch panel of the player as shown in FIG. 68(b), for example. It may be an operation intervention effect in which the operation (including 29) is intervened.
The operation intervention effect to be executed as the fanfare effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a music piece to be output from the speakers 19a and 19b during execution of the big hit performance (see FIG. 68(b)), and a character appearing during execution of the big hit performance. Is an effect for selecting, and an effect for selecting an effect mode of an effect during a big hit.

The erasing mode of the winning notification image M1 can be appropriately selected, and for example, the winning notification image M1 may be instantaneously disappeared, or the winning notification image M1 may be gradually thinned and faded (fade-out mode). ), the winning notification image M1 may be moved to the outside of the display area of the display device 41 and disappear, or the winning notification image M1 may be displayed in the display area of the display device 41 by a predetermined character image. It may be in a mode of being blown out to the outside and disappearing.
In addition, when consecutive winnings to the special winning opening occur (that is, when a plurality of gaming balls flow into the special winning opening substantially at the same time), the winning consecutive gaming balls in an erasing mode different from the normal erasing mode. The winning notification images M1 of the same number as the number may be deleted. For example, when the normal erasing mode is a mode in which it disappears instantly and the winning notification mode M is deleted one by one, the winning notification modes M1 in the same number as the number of consecutively won game balls are instantaneously deleted. It may be deleted simultaneously in the mode, or the winning notification mode M1 of the same number as the number of continuously winning game balls may be deleted one by one in the fade-out mode (or simultaneously).

In addition, in the round effect corresponding to a specific round game (for example, a round game in which a large winning opening opening time for short opening is set), the prize number notification effect may not be executed.
Further, if the presentation mode of the prize number notification effect executed during the round effect corresponding to the specific round game is different from the effect mode of the prize number notification effect executed during the round effect corresponding to the round game other than the specific round game. You can let me. Specifically, for example, in the prize number notification effect executed during the round game (round game other than the specific round game) in which the large winning opening opening time for long opening is set, for example, shown in FIG. 67 or FIG. 68. As described above, each time a game ball wins a big winning opening, only a deletion effect of erasing one winning notification image M1 is executed and a big winning opening opening time for short opening is set. In the prize number notification effect executed during the (game), for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), an erase effect that erases the prize notification image M1 one by one each time a game ball wins the big winning opening, and an erase effect. Other effects may be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 69(a), as an effect other than the erasing effect, a predetermined character appears based on a game ball winning the special winning opening, and the character causes a predetermined line (such as "great"). The production to be emitted is being executed.

Further, in the winning number notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), a game ball wins a large winning opening without displaying the same number of winning notification images M1 as the upper limit number of winnings at the start of the winning number notification effect. It may be an effect that one prize notification image M1 appears for each. In this case, since the number of the displayed prize notification images M1 matches the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening in the running round game, the player wins the big winning opening in the running round game. It is possible to grasp the number of game balls played.
In this case, when the game ball is won in the big winning opening before the start of the prize number notification effect (that is, during the execution of the fanfare effect), after the start of the prize number notification effect, the start of the prize number notification effect. The prize notification images M1 as many as the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening are made to appear one by one. Further, in this case, the appearance mode of the prize notification image M1 can be appropriately selected, and for example, the prize notification image M1 may be displayed instantaneously, or the prize notification image M1 may be gradually darkened (fade in). Aspect) or the prize notification image M1 may move from outside the display area of the display device 41 to a fixed position within the display area. Further, in this case, when consecutive winnings to the special winning opening occur (that is, when a plurality of game balls flow into the special winning opening substantially at the same time), the consecutive winnings are made in an appearance mode different from the normal appearance mode. The prize notification image M1 may be made to appear in the same number as the number of game balls played.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(c), the current round number may be notified by the round notification image M2. In the example shown in FIG. 69(c), one round notification image M2 is made to appear each time the round effect is executed, that is, the number of displayed round notification images M2 matches the current number of rounds. However, the reverse is also possible. That is, the same number of round notification images M2 as the upper limit value of the number of rounds ("16" or "4" in the present embodiment) is being produced for fanfare (or at the start of the round production corresponding to the first round game). Alternatively, the round notification image M2 may be deleted one by one each time the round effect is executed. In this case, the number of displayed round notification images M2 matches the remaining number of rounds.
Further, the round notification image M2 and the number of rounds do not have to correspond at 1:1. That is, one round notification image M2 may be made to appear each time a predetermined multiple times (for example, four times) of the round effect is executed. Alternatively, conversely, the same number of round notification images M2 as "the upper limit of the number of rounds/predetermined multiple times" is displayed during the fanfare production, and the round notification image M2 is displayed every time the predetermined multiple round production is executed. You may make it erase|eliminate one by one.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 69(c), the same number of dotted line images as the upper limit value of the number of rounds (that is, an image showing the area in which the round notification image M2 is displayed) is displayed during the fanfare production or the like. To the same number of round lines as the upper limit of the number of rounds ○ It is not necessary to display an image. For example, as big winning opening information indicating a big hit pattern, big winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long open) and big winning opening opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open) When any one of the above is selected, the round continuation notification effect is executed at the 4th round, and if the selected special winning opening opening information is the special winning opening opening information 2, the continuation of the round is notified in the round continuing notification effect. In the rounds after the 5th round, the special winning opening is opened with a long opening, and if the selected special winning opening opening information is the big winning opening opening information 3, the rank down effect is performed in the round continuation notification effect and the round is performed. There is a case where the discontinuation is notified and the special winning opening is opened with a short opening in the fifth round and thereafter. In such a case, initially, four dotted line ○ images are displayed, and when the continuation of the round is notified in the round continuation notification effect, the remaining dotted line ○ images are displayed, and the round non-continuation is performed in the round continuation notification effect. The remaining dotted-line image may not be displayed when is notified. As a result, it is possible to inform that the subsequent round is long open by the additionally displayed dotted line image, and the interest is improved.
The winning notification image M1 and the round notification image M2 are not limited to circular images and can be changed as appropriate. For example, they may be polygonal images or character images. The winning notification image M1 and the round notification image M2 may have different shapes.

Further, the winning notification image M1 is displayed on the front side of the predetermined image displayed in the display area of the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIG. The predetermined image may be hidden.
Specifically, as shown in, for example, FIG. 71(a), the effect control device 300 starts the prize effect notification effect at the same time as the start of the round effect, and the same panel shape as the prize upper limit number (here, a rectangular panel). The winning notification image M1 in the shape of () is displayed on the front side of the predetermined image (here, the character image, the serif image, and the decoration image) displayed on the display device 41. After that, the effect control device 300 erases the prize notification images M1 one by one each time a game ball wins the special winning opening, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 71(b) to (g). As a result, the predetermined image hidden by the same number of panel-shaped prize notification images M1 as the upper limit number of prizes becomes gradually visible. Then, when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs, an over-winning notification effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(h). Here, the over-winning notification effect using the predetermined image hidden by the winning notification image M1 is executed.

Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the predetermined images are the character image, the serif image, and the decoration image, but the predetermined images are not limited to these and can be changed as appropriate.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the shape and size of the panel-shaped prize notification image M1 is the shape and size of a small area obtained by dividing the display area of the display device 41 by the same number as the upper limit number of prizes. Since the same image is displayed on the display device 41, the entire predetermined image is hidden by the same number of panel-shaped prize notification images M1 as the upper limit number of prizes. It can be changed as appropriate. That is, it suffices if at least a part of the predetermined image displayed on the display device 41 can be hidden by the same number of panel-shaped winning notification images M1 as the maximum winning number.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 71, the over-winning notification effect is executed when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs, but the over-winning notification effect is also started at the start of the winning notification effect, and the panel-shaped winning The image related to the over-winning notification effect (for example, the image shown in FIG. 71(h), hereinafter referred to as “over-winning notification image”) may be hidden by the notification image M1. Specifically, at the start of the winning number notification effect, the same number of panel-shaped winning notification images M1 as "the upper limit number of winnings+1" is displayed on the front side of the over-winning notification image as the predetermined image. At that time, other than the serif image in the over-prize notification image (for example, a character image or a decoration image) is hidden by the same number of panel-shaped prize-notifying images M1 as the upper limit number of winning, and the serif in the over-prize notification image. The image (for example, "It's intense heat!") is hidden by the remaining panel-shaped winning notification image M1. Then, each time the game ball wins the big winning opening, the winning notification image M1 for concealing other than the serif image is deleted one by one, and when the over-winning occurs, the winning notification image M1 for concealing the serif image is deleted. It may be done. As a result, a part of the over-winning notification image can be visually recognized before the over-winning occurs, so that the interest for the over-winning is improved.

Furthermore, in this case, one of the condition that an over-winning has occurred in the big winning opening and the condition that the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening 35 exceeds a prescribed number (for example, 3 in one round) When the above condition is satisfied, the winning notification image M1 that hides the dialogue image may be deleted. As a result, in addition to the condition that an over-winning has occurred in the major winning opening, the condition that the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening 35 has exceeded the specified number Since the deletion probability of the notification image M1 is increased, the interest is improved.
Alternatively, if both the condition that an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs and the condition that the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds the specified number, the winning that conceals the dialogue image is won. The notification image M1 may be deleted.
Further, in this case, the panel-shaped winning notification image M1 is not an image that hides (makes invisible) the over-winning notification image, but an image that makes it difficult to visually recognize the over-winning notification image (for example, a semitransparent image). May be. As a result, even if the winning notification image M1 that hides the speech image is not erased, it is possible to infer the content to be notified or suggested by the over-winning notification effect, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the panel-shaped winning notification image M1 (may be the winning notification image M1 that makes a predetermined image invisible or may be the winning notification image M1 that makes a predetermined image difficult to view) is a large winning opening. When the game ball wins or when an over-winning occurs, the game ball may not be erased but may be gradually changed to be transparent. In this case, the portion of the predetermined image hidden by the prize notification image M1 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize notification image M1.

In addition, the winning number notification effect includes the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44. At least one effect may be used as long as it is an effect that informs the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening in the running round game. Further, when the gaming machine 10 includes a vibrating device or a blower as the effect device, it is also possible to execute the winning number notification effect by using the vibrating device or the blower.
That is, as shown in FIG. 72, for example, the winning number notification effect may be an effect of notifying the number of game balls won to the special winning opening in the running round game by emitting light from the LED of the frame decoration device 18. .. Specifically, as shown in, for example, FIG. 72(a), the effect control device 300 starts the winning effect notification effect at the same time as the start of the round effect, and among the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18, the effect of the glass frame 15 is displayed. The LED arranged in the predetermined area is turned on. Here, the predetermined region of the glass frame 15 is a region 15a to 15j having the same number as the winning upper limit number (10).

Then, the effect control device 300, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (b) ~ (c), every time a game ball wins the big winning opening, LED arranged in the first area 15a → the second area 15b. LED arranged→the LED arranged in the third region 15c→the LED arranged in the fourth region 15d→the LED arranged in the fifth region 15e→the LED arranged in the sixth region 15f→the seventh region 15g The LEDs arranged in this order are turned off: the LEDs arranged in the eighth area 15h, the LEDs arranged in the ninth area 15i, and the LEDs arranged in the tenth area 15j. As a result, the number of non-light emitting areas matches the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening in the running round game, so that the player has won the game ball that has won the large winning opening in the running round game. You can figure out the number.
Alternatively, conversely, at the start of the winning number notification effect, the LED arranged in the predetermined area of the glass frame 15 is turned off, and the LED arranged in the first area 15a is displayed every time the game ball wins the big winning opening. The LEDs arranged in the second region 15b→the LEDs arranged in the third region 15c→... May be lit in this order. In this case, since the number of light emitting areas matches the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening in the running round game, the player has the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening in the running round game. Can be grasped.

Further, instead of the winning number notification effect, it is also possible to execute a payout number notification effect that notifies the payout amount based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 73, for example, the payout amount notification effect notifies the sum of the payout amount based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening and the payout amount based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35. It may be an effect.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(a), the effect control device 300 starts the payout amount notification effect with the start of the round effect, and displays the total payout amount in the running round game. Specifically, for example, "+10" is added to the total payout number each time a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, and "+14" is paid out total number each time the game ball wins a major winning opening. Add to. Furthermore, during the execution of the fanfare production, that is, before the payout number notification production is started, when the game ball wins the big winning opening or the general winning opening 35 and the payout based on the winning is performed, for example, FIG. As shown, after the payout number notification effect is started, the number of game balls paid out during the execution of the fanfare effect is added to the total payout number. As a result, the player can grasp the total number of payouts in the round game being executed, so that the interest is improved.
In this case, the payout number notification effect may be an effect notifying the total payout number in the running round game, but an effect notifying the total payout number in the special game state being generated. That is, when the next round game starts, the total payout amount may not be cleared to 0, and the total payout amount may be continuously updated (added) until the special game state ends. As a result, the player can grasp the total number of payouts in one special game state, which improves the interest.

Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the effect control device 300 starts the payout amount notification effect with the start of the round effect, and displays the remaining payout amount in the running round game. Specifically, each time a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, for example, "+10" is subtracted from the remaining payout amount, and each time a gaming ball wins the major winning opening, for example, "+14" is the remaining payout amount. Subtract from. Furthermore, if there is a payout of a game ball even when the remaining payout amount becomes "0" (that is, if there is a payout of a game ball that exceeds the expected payout number in one round game), a specific effect ( For example, an effect of displaying a character image such as “?” or “I did it!” is executed. Furthermore, during execution of the fanfare production, that is, before the payout amount notification production is started, when a game ball wins the big winning opening or the general winning opening 35 and a payout based on the winning is made, for example, FIG. As shown, after the payout number notification effect is started, the number of game balls paid out during the execution of the fanfare effect is subtracted from the remaining payout number. As a result, the player can know that the number of remaining payouts in the round game being executed and the number of game balls that have exceeded the expected number of payouts in one round game have been paid out, so that the interest is improved.

In this case, the payout amount notification effect may be an effect notifying the remaining payout number in the running round game, but an effect notifying the payout remaining number in the special game state being generated. That is, when the next round game starts, the estimated payout amount (eg, “150”) in one round game is not displayed and the estimated payout amount is not subtracted, but at the start of the first round game. It is also possible to display the expected payout amount in one special game state (for example, "2000") and continuously subtract the estimated payout amount until the special game state is completed. As a result, the player can grasp the number of remaining payouts in one special game state, which improves the interest.

The payout amount notification effect is at least one of the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44. It may be any effect as long as it notifies the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening in the running round game. Further, when the gaming machine 10 includes a vibrating device or an air blower as the effect device, it is possible to execute the payout amount notification effect using the vibrating device or the air blower.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a special result, a special winning opening (special variation winning device) 38) Round in which a game ball is converted into a state in which it is easy to win a prize In a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed a plurality of times, a production control unit (production control device 300) for controlling the production of a game is provided, and a round is provided. The game ends when the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening reaches a prescribed number (upper limit number of winnings) or when a predetermined time (large winning opening opening time) elapses, and the production control means It is possible to execute a special game in-game effect (big hit medium effect) including a start effect (fanfare effect) performed at the start of the occurrence of the game state and a round effect performed during the round game, and a specific round game in the special game state ( In the case of the present embodiment, it is possible to end the start effect and start the round effect corresponding to the particular round game during execution of the first round game) (see FIG. 66(c)). , In the round production, it is possible to execute the winning number notification production corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening, and the execution of the start production in the round production corresponding to the specific round game after the start production is finished. The prize number notification effect for the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening is executed (see FIG. 68).

Therefore, in the round effect, it is possible to execute the winning number notification effect corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening, and further, in the round effect corresponding to the specific round game after the start effect, in the round effect, Since the winning number notification production for the number of gaming balls that have won the big winning opening is executed during the execution of the start production, it is possible to enhance the interest of the special game production (large jackpot production).
The specific round game is not limited to the first round game (the first round game). That is, the specific round game may be a round game other than the first round game, such as the second round game.
Further, the winning number notification effect may be executed not only during the special game state but also during the small hitting game state.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, after a predetermined number of predetermined images (winning notification image M1) are displayed in the round effect, the predetermined image is erased each time a game ball wins a big winning opening. It is possible to execute the winning number notification production, and the predetermined image is not displayed in the start production, and if the game ball wins the special winning opening during the execution of the start production, it corresponds to a specific round game. In the prize number notification effect executed in the round effect, it is possible to delete the predetermined images corresponding to the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening during the execution of the start effect (see FIG. 68).

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening in the running round game, and also the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening before the start of the winning number notification production. It is possible to enhance the interest of the special game mid-game production (big hit mid-game production).
Further, since the predetermined image (winning notification image M1) is not displayed during the start effect (fanfare effect) and the predetermined image is displayed only during the round effect, the predetermined image is always displayed (the predetermined image during the start effect). (When is displayed), a special feeling can be given to the round effect. Therefore, since the interest of the round effect is improved, the interest of the effect during the special game can be increased.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes a special effect including a start effect (fanfare effect) performed at the start of the occurrence of the special game state and a round effect performed during the round game. It is possible to execute an effect during the game (effect during a big hit), and during the execution of a specific round game in the special game state (in the case of the present embodiment, a round game of the first round), the start effect is ended and the specific It is possible to start the round effect corresponding to the round game (see FIG. 66(c)), and in the round effect, a predetermined image (winning notification) for each winning of the game ball to the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38). It is possible to execute the winning number notification effect in which the image M1) is displayed (see FIG. 69(b)), the predetermined image is not displayed in the start effect, and the game ball is moved to the special winning opening during the execution of the start effect. When a prize is won, in a prize number notification effect executed in a round effect corresponding to a specific round game, a predetermined image corresponding to the number of game balls won in the special winning opening is displayed during execution of the start effect. Can be configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening in the running round game, and also the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening before the start of the winning number notification production. It is possible to enhance the interest of the special game mid-game production (big hit mid-game production).
Further, since the predetermined image (winning notification image M1) is not displayed during the start effect (fanfare effect) and the predetermined image is displayed only during the round effect, the predetermined image is always displayed (the predetermined image during the start effect). (When is displayed), a special feeling can be given to the round effect. Therefore, since the interest of the round effect is improved, the interest of the effect during the special game can be increased.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes the player to select one option from a plurality of options in the start effect (fanfare effect) (operation intervention). The effect can be configured to be executable (see FIG. 68(b)).
With this configuration, it is possible to expand the merit of not displaying the predetermined image (winning notification image M1) during the start effect (fanfare effect). That is, since the predetermined image is not displayed during the start effect, it is possible to concentrate on the selection effect, so that the interest of the start effect can be improved and the interest of the special game effect can be increased.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a general winning opening 35 in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning of the game balls, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, In the round game, when the number of winnings (upper limit number of winnings) of the game balls to the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) reaches a prescribed number, or a predetermined time (large winning opening opening time) has elapsed. In this case, the production control means can execute a special game mid-game production (big hit mid-stage production) including a start production (fanfare production) performed at the start of the occurrence of the special game state and a round production performed during the round game. Yes, during execution of a specific round game in the special game state (in the case of the present embodiment, the first round game), the start effect may be ended and the round effect corresponding to the specific round game may be started. It is possible (see FIG. 66(c)), and in the round effect, it is possible to execute the payout amount notification effect corresponding to the payout amount based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening and the general winning opening 35, and the start effect is In the round effect corresponding to the specific round game after the end, the payout number notification effect corresponding to the payout amount based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening and the general winning opening 35 during the execution of the start effect is executed. It can be configured (see FIGS. 74 and 75).
With this configuration, it is possible to execute the payout amount notification effect corresponding to the payout amount based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening and the general winning opening 35 in the round effect, and the start effect is completed. In a round effect corresponding to a later specific round game, it is possible to execute a payout amount notification effect corresponding to the payout amount based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening and the general winning opening 35 during the execution of the start effect. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the special game mid-game production (major hit mid-game production).

<1st winning ball number notification production>
The gaming machine 10 can execute a first acquisition payout number notification effect of notifying the total number of payouts in the special game state at the end of the special game state.
In the present embodiment, the sum of the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening and the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the general winning opening 35 is the total payout amount. The total number of payouts may be the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening, or the total number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening and the number of game balls to general winning openings 35. It may be the sum of the number of payouts based on winning.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
First, FIG. 76 shows the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described winning a prize switch/state monitoring process. This fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is a process performed for each of the two big winning opening switches 38a of the special variation winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37. With regard to the big winning opening (special variation winning device 38) and Hoden (ordinary variation winning device 37), it is easy to open the opening/closing member, insert the game ball, and pay out the prize ball. In addition to monitoring fraud.

In this fraud & winning a prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error monitored is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is the special winning port switch 38a, and the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is started. In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning a prize device 37 is executed based on the hit of the ordinary figure.

When it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of illegal prizes is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated number of illegal prizes is equal to or more than the number of fraud occurrence determinations of the monitoring target. It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the case of the present embodiment, the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning hole switch that is the object of error monitoring, but the number of fraudulent occurrences defines a different number for each type of winning hole switch. You can also The determination number is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball is in the effective period of the big winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being determined to be illegal when the player has won the prize after passing or when there is noise on the signal, and to not easily determine that it is an error although it is not illegal.

If the number of fraudulent prizes is not equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations of the monitoring target (step S325; N), the winning port monitoring table of the target winning port switch is prepared (step S330). The winning port switch/condition monitoring process prepared in the prize monitoring table (fraud monitoring table), the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of the data to determine whether there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information , The lower address of the illegal prize number area, the illegal prize error notification command, the upper limit value of the illegal prize number (the number of illegal occurrence judgments), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission/update) are defined. ..

If the number of fraudulent prizes is greater than or equal to the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is kept to be the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (step S326), and the target fraudulent prize notification timer area is initialized. (For example, 60000 ms) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraud command is prepared (step S328), a fraud prize generation flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

On the other hand, when the fraud monitoring period is not in progress (step S322; N), the prize-winning port monitoring table of the target prize-winning port switch is prepared (step S330), and the prize-number counter updating process (step S331) for setting the prize ball is performed. To do. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and it is determined whether or not the notification timer update is permitted (step S333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is ended. If updating of the notification timer is permitted (step S333; Y), -1 is updated if the target notification timer is not 0 (step S334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch of the error monitoring target is the one special winning port switch 38a, and is not permitted when the winning port switch of the error monitoring target is the other special winning port switch 38a. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as often with regard to the injustice notification of the special variation winning device 38, and prevents the time from being increased in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 msec). .. In addition, when the winning opening switch of the error monitoring target is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335), and if the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step S336), and the fraud prize cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of illegal prizes of interest is cleared ( In step S339), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value in the fraud flag area (step S340).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S340; Y), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (step S340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S341), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S342), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an incorrect prize winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, and the start and end of error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning prize counter update processing]
FIG. 77 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps S308 and S331) in the above-mentioned winning port switch/state monitoring process and fraud & winning monitoring process. In the prize number counter updating process, first, the number of prize hole switches to be monitored is acquired from the prize hole monitoring table (step S351), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize hole switch (to be exact, a change in input). The determination is made (step S352). In addition to the number of times the monitoring is repeated (the number of switches), the prize winning table of the prize winning port monitoring table (illegal monitoring table) prepared in the prize winning port switch/state monitoring process, a monitoring switch bit for each switch, Information on the lower address of the prize number counter area 1 and the lower address of the prize number counter area 2 is defined.

When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S363), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S364). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). If an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (transmission of payout command) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0 to 65535).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step S359). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0 to 255). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the process proceeds to step S361. If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the process proceeds to step S361.

Then, a prize detection command corresponding to the target switch is prepared (step S361), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S362). By transmitting the winning detection command corresponding to the target switch to the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 can record the number of detections by each switch. In addition, by transmitting a winning detection command corresponding to the special winning opening switch 38a and a winning detection command corresponding to the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35 to the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 can be used in each round game. Since it is possible to calculate the total payout amount, it is possible to execute the payout amount notification effect, the first acquired payout number notification effect, and the second acquired payout number notification effect.

Then, the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S363), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S364). When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S364; N), the process returns to the process (step S352) of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is finished (step S364; Y), the winning number counter updating process is finished. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

As described above, the effect control device 300 executes the big hit mid-time effect (fanfare effect, round effect, interval effect, and ending effect) during the special game state. The first earned ball number notification effect is executed in the ending effect of the big hit performance. On the other hand, the above-mentioned payout amount notification effect is executed in the round effect of the big hit medium effect. Therefore, the first obtained payout number notification effect and the payout number notification effect are common in that the total payout number is notified in the big hit medium effect.

78(a) and FIG. 79 show an example of processing relating to the payout amount notification effect and the first acquired payout number notification effect.
When the fanfare production is finished, the production control device 300 starts the round production corresponding to the first round game and the payout amount notification production, and when the round production corresponding to the first round game is finished, When the interval effect is started and the interval effect ends, the round effect corresponding to the second round game is started and the payout amount notification effect is started. Production control device 300 repeats such processing until the round game of the final round is completed.
Then, the effect control device 300 starts the ending effect when the round effect corresponding to the round game of the final round is finished as shown in FIG. 78(a) (t21). At the end of the round effect corresponding to the round game of the final round (that is, at the end of the payout amount notification effect started together with the round effect corresponding to the round game of the final round), for example, shown in FIG. 79(a). Thus, the final result of the total number of payouts in the final round game is displayed on the display device 41.

The production control device 300 notifies the total number of payouts in the special game state in progress (that is, the sum of the total payout numbers in each round game in the special game state in progress) together with the start of the ending production. The number-of-ball-outs notification production is performed (t21). As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(b), a notification image G11 for notifying the total payout amount in the special game state that is occurring is displayed on the display device 41.
Next, the effect control device 300 performs the first game state switching notification effect for notifying the end of the special game state when the first acquired payout number notification effect is completed (t22). Accordingly, for example, as shown in FIG. 79C, a predetermined notification image (for example, a cherry blossom pattern image) is displayed on the display device 41.
Next, the effect control device 300, when the first game state switching notification effect ends, performs a variable effect corresponding to the next special figure variable display game (t23). As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 79D, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the next special figure variation display game is displayed on the display device 41.

As described above, the payout number notification effect may be an effect notifying the total payout number in the running round game, but a realtime notification of the total payout number in the special game state being generated. .. That is, when the next round game starts, the total payout amount may not be cleared to 0, and the total payout amount may be continuously updated (added) until the special game state ends. Therefore, in the case where the payout amount notification effect is an effect for notifying the total payout amount in the special game state in which it is occurring in real time, the information finally notified by the payout amount notification effect (that is, the round of the final round) The information notified by the payout number notification effect at the end of the round effect corresponding to the game) is the same as the information notified by the first acquisition payout number notification effect.

Further, as described above, the payout amount notification effect may be an effect of notifying the total number of payouts but an amount of remaining payouts.
In addition, in the drawings after FIG. 79, the illustration of the first waiting hold display unit 41b1, the second waiting hold display unit 41b2, the running hold display unit 41c, the small symbol variation display unit 41d, and the numeral hold display unit 41e. Is omitted.

Here, if the total payout amount is small and the total payout amount is informed, the player may feel uncomfortable and entertaining. In addition, if the total number of payouts has decreased due to a problem caused by someone other than the player, for example, a game ball could not be awarded to the special winning opening due to a problem with the gaming machine, the total payout number is notified. Then, the player's discomfort may be promoted. Further, in the present embodiment, the payout number notification effect is executed during the round effect to notify the total payout number, and the first acquisition payout number notification effect is executed during the ending effect to notify the total payout number. Therefore, the player's discomfort may be rekindled by the first acquired payout number notification effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the number of game balls that has won the special winning opening during the special game state is less than the first predetermined number (for example, one), the first obtained payout number notification effect is not executed. That is, the notification image G11 for notifying the total payout amount in the special game state that is occurring is not displayed on the display device 41.

The effect control device 300 stores the number of detections of each switch in the detection number storage area of the RAM 322 (see FIG. 4), and game control the winning detection command (see step S361 of FIG. 77) corresponding to the target switch. Upon reception from the device 100, the detection count of the target switch among the detection counts stored in the detection count storage area of the RAM 322 is updated.

The number of game balls that have won the special winning opening during one special game state is, for example, the number of detections at the special winning opening switch 38a in the period from the reception of the fanfare command to the reception of the ending command, that is, the fanfare command. It is the difference between the number of detections by the special winning opening switch 38a at the time of reception and the number of detections by the special winning opening switch 38a at the time of receiving the ending command. Therefore, when the fanfare command is received and when the ending command is received, the number of times of detection by the special winning opening switch 38a is acquired from the detection number storage area of the RAM 322, and the number of times of detection acquired when the fanfare command is received and the ending command are acquired. By calculating the difference from the number of detections, it is possible to determine whether or not the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening during the special game state is less than the first predetermined number.

Based on the information stored in the detection count storage area of the RAM 322, the effect control device 300 determines whether the number of game balls that has won the special winning opening during the special game state is less than a first predetermined number (for example, one). Determine whether or not. When it is determined that the number is not less than the first predetermined number, the total payout amount in the special gaming state is calculated based on the information stored in the detection number storage area of the RAM 322 to obtain the first winning number. A notification effect is executed (see FIG. 78(a)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number is less than the first predetermined number, an alternative effect is executed instead of the first acquired payout number notification effect (see FIG. 78(b)).

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 78(b), a first game state switching notification effect is executed as an alternative effect. Specifically, when the effect control device 300 determines that the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening during the special game state is not less than the first predetermined number, the first control is performed during the first period (t21 to t22). The obtained payout number notification effect is executed, and the first game state switching notification effect is executed in the subsequent second period (t22 to t23). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening during the special game state is less than the first predetermined number, an extension process for extending the execution time of the first game state switching notification effect is performed, The first game state switching notification effect is executed not only in the second period (t22 to t23) but also in the first period (t21 to t22). As a result, when the total payout amount is small, the first obtained payout number notification effect is not executed, and thus the player's discomfort can be reduced.

Further, the effect control device 300 calculates the total payout amount based on the information stored in the RAM 322, and notifies the calculated total payout amount by the first acquired payout number notification effect. Since the RAM 322 cannot hold the stored contents unless power is supplied, for example, when a power failure occurs during the special gaming state, it is not possible to notify the accurate total payout amount by the first acquisition payout number notification effect. is there. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, not only is the total payout amount calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 322, but it is also determined whether or not to execute the first earned payout number notification effect. It is possible to reduce the execution probability of the first acquired payout number notification effect, which cannot notify the total payout number.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 78(c) and 78(d), when the effect control device 300 determines that the number of game balls won in the special winning opening during the special game state is not less than the first predetermined number, , The first winning coin number notification effect is executed in the first period (t31 to t32), and the first game state switching notification effect is executed in the subsequent second period (t32 to t33). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening during the special game state is less than the first predetermined number, the first game state switching notification production as the alternative production in the first period (t31 to t32). It is also possible to execute the same effect as, and to execute the first game state switching notification effect in the subsequent second period (t32 to t33). Even in the case of such a configuration, when the total payout number is small, the first acquired payout number notification effect is not executed, so that the player's discomfort can be reduced.

Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 78(e) and (f), when the effect control device 300 determines that the number of game balls winning the special winning opening during the special game state is not less than the first predetermined number, , A normal first winning coin number notification effect (first winning coin number notification effect of the first effect mode) is executed in the first period (t21 to t22), and then in the second period (t22 to t23). The first game state switching notification effect is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of game balls that has won the special winning opening during the special game state is less than the first predetermined number, the first effect of the second effect mode as the alternative effect in the first period (t21 to t22). It is also possible to execute the obtained payout number notification effect, and to execute the first game state switching notification effect during the subsequent second period (t22 to t23). In the first obtained payout number notification effect of the first effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(b), in addition to the notification image G11 for notifying the total payout amount in the special game state that is occurring, a predetermined character image In contrast to G12 being displayed on the display device 41, in the first winning coin number notification production of the second production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(e), the total number of payouts in the special game state that is occurring. The notification image G11 for notifying is displayed, but the predetermined character image G12 is not displayed. With this configuration, when the total payout amount is small, the display is different from the normal display, and the player's discomfort can be reduced. Further, by displaying the character image G12, it is possible to give a special feeling to the player, and it is possible to increase the motivation to win the special winning opening during the special game state.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 78(a), (b) and FIGS. 78(e), (f), the specifications are such that the first game state switching notification effect is executed at the end of the special game state, and FIG. In the examples shown in () and (d), the specification is such that the first game state switching notification effect is executed at the start of the variable display game immediately after the end of the special game state, but the specification can be changed appropriately. That is, for example, in the specification of executing the first game state switching notification effect at the end of the special game state, the same effect as the first game state switching notification effect is executed as the alternative effect in the first period (t21 to t22). Is also good. Further, in the specification of executing the first game state switching notification effect at the start of the variable display game immediately after the end of the special game state, the first obtained number of coins in the second effect mode as the alternative effect in the first period (t31 to t32). You may perform notification production.

In addition, the alternative production is not limited to the first game state switching notification production and the second production mode first acquisition ball number notification production, and is not the first acquisition ball number notification production or first game state switching notification production. It may be a different presentation.
Also, in the example shown in FIGS. 78(a) to (f), the alternative effect is executed in all of the first period (t21 to t22, t31 to 32), but the period for executing the alternative effect is the first period. It may be only part of the period.
Also, the first game state switching notification effect is an image according to the game state after the big hit (low probability state or high probability state, whether it is a short-time state or a state not a short-time state, etc.), or the currently set probability setting. It may be an effect that displays an image that suggests a value. As a result, the interest of the first game state switching notification effect is improved.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a special result, the variation winning device (special variation winning device). In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which 38) is converted into a state in which a gaming ball is easy to win, a storage unit (RAM 322) that cannot store and store the stored information when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is stopped. ) And effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, the storage means pays out based on the number of winnings of the game ball to the variable winning device or the winning of the variable winning device. It is possible to store the number of payout game balls according to the ball, and the effect control means, at the end of the special game state, a notification effect for notifying the number of winnings or the number of payout game balls in the special game state (the first effect mode). 1 winning coin number notification effect) can be executed, and if the number of winnings or the number of payout game balls in the special game state stored in the storage means is less than a predetermined number (first predetermined number), the notification effect Is executed without executing (the first game state switching notification effect and the first acquired number of coins notification effect in the second effect mode) (FIGS. 78(a), (b) and 78(c), See (d) and FIGS. 78(e) and (f)).

Therefore, when the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device (in the present embodiment, the large winning opening in the present embodiment) in the special game state is small, the obtained number-of-balls informing effect (the first effect mode first) Since the obtained number-of-balls informing effect is not executed, the player's discomfort can be reduced, and the interest in the obtained number-of-balls informing effect can be enhanced.
The variable winning device is not limited to the special winning port (special variable winning device 38) and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, the normal variable winning device 37 or the large winning port having a V switch.
Further, in the embodiment, the number of winnings (the number of times of detection by the special winning opening switch 38a) is stored in the storage means (RAM 322), but the number of payout game balls (the winning of the gaming balls into the big winning opening is stored in the storage means. It is also possible to store the payout amount based on
Further, in the embodiment, the number of payout game balls in the special game state (total payout number in the special game state) is notified by the notification effect (the first acquisition payout number notification effect in the first effect mode). The number of prizes in the special game state by the notification effect (the number of prizes of the game ball to the big prize hole in the special game state, or the number of prizes of the game ball to the big prize hole in the special game state and general in the special game state) The sum of the number of winning game balls to the winning opening 35) may be notified.
Further, the predetermined number (first predetermined number) is not limited to one and may be a plurality.

Further, of the number of prizes or payout game balls in the special game state stored in the storage means, a predetermined period during the special game state (for example, a period of a specific round game (a period of the first round of the round game, Period of the final round of the round game, period of the V round game, etc., period of specific multiple round games (period from the round game of the second round to the round game of the third round, from the first round game) When the number of prizes or the number of payout game balls in the period up to the fifth round game, the period from the third round game to the V round game, etc.) is less than a predetermined number (first predetermined number) Instead of executing the effect (first earned coin number notification effect in the first effect mode), execute alternative effect (first game state switching notification effect or first acquired coin number notification effect in the second effect mode). You can
Further, the display mode of the character image G12 may be changed according to the number of prizes or the number of payout game balls in the special game state.
In addition, not only when the number of winnings or the number of payout gaming balls in the special game state is less than the predetermined number, but also when a predetermined error occurs, the obtained number-of-balls informing effect (the first winning/discharging of the first effect mode) It is also possible to cancel the execution of the (ball number notification effect) and execute the alternative effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), the first time period (t21 to t22) in which the notification effect (the first acquisition payout number notification effect in the first effect mode) is executed. , T31 to t32), and a second state (t22 to t23, t32 to t33), a game state switching notification effect (first game state switching notification effect) for notifying that the game state is switched can be executed, and a prize is won. The number (the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening during the special game state) or the number of paying-out gaming balls (the number of payouts based on the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning prize during the special gaming state) (first predetermined) If it is less than the number), the game state switching notification effect can be configured to be executed as the alternative effect over the first period and the second period (FIGS. 78(a), (b) and FIG. 78 ( See c) and (d)).
With this configuration, the game state switching notification effect (first game state switching notification effect) is extended (in the case of the examples shown in FIGS. 78(c) and 78(d), it seems to have been extended). Therefore, it is possible to cancel the execution of the acquired payout number notification effect (first acquired payout number notification effect) without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a special result, the variable winning device (special variation winning device 38 ) Is displayed on the display device 41 at a predetermined timing (in the present embodiment, a notification image G11 and a character image G12) on a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game ball is converted into a state in which a game ball is easily won. The display control means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the display control means changes in a predetermined period during the special game state (in the case of the present embodiment, from the reception of the fanfare command until the reception of the ending command). If the number of winning game balls to the winning device is not more than the predetermined number (first predetermined number), the predetermined image is not displayed (FIGS. 78(a), (b), 78(c), (d). ) And FIGS. 78(e) and (f)). Specifically, in the examples shown in FIGS. 78(a), 78(b) and FIGS. 78(c), 78(d), the display of the notification image G11 and the character image G12 is stopped, and FIG. 78(e), In the example shown in (f), the display of the character image G12 is stopped.

Therefore, when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device during the predetermined period during the special game state does not reach the predetermined number (first predetermined number), the predetermined image is not displayed even at the predetermined timing. As compared with a gaming machine that always displays a predetermined image at a predetermined timing, the interest of the game can be enhanced.
The predetermined image is not limited to the notification image G11 and the character image G12, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the maker name, the model name, the number of consecutive games in the special game state, and the winning area (big winning opening, general winning opening, It may be a title image or the like showing a title according to the number of winnings (or the number of gaming balls paid out in accordance with the winnings in the winning area).

<Direction for notification of the number of 2nd winning balls>
The gaming machine 10 is capable of executing a second earned ball number notification effect for notifying the total payout amount in the time saving state at the end of the time saving state (electric power saving state).
In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 56, it is possible to generate a time saving state after the end of the special game state. Specifically, if the time reduction determination data is not the time saving operation data (step A1201; N), that is, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result that does not cause a time saving state, the result is shown in FIG. When the jackpot end setting process 1 shown is executed and the time reduction determination data is time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), that is, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result causing a time saving state, The jackpot end setting process 2 shown in FIG. 56(b) is executed. Then, by the jackpot end setting process 2 shown in FIG. 56(b), after the special game state ends, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state (probability change state) and a time saving state. Further, by setting an initial value (for example, 100) in the high probability variation frequency region, for example, as shown in FIG. 80, by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the high probability state and the time saving state are executed. Ends.

[High probability change count update process]
FIG. 80 illustrates details of the high-probability variation number updating process (steps A726 and A743) in the above-described special figure displaying process. In this high-probability-variation-number-of-times updating process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure high probability (in a high probability state) (step A761). When it is not during the special figure high probability (step A761; N), the high probability variation number updating process is ended. In addition, when the special figure high probability is in progress (step A761; Y), the number of high-probability fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A762), and it is determined whether or not the number of high-probability fluctuations becomes "0" (step A763). ).

If the number of times of high probability variation is not “0” (step A763; N), the updating process of the number of high probability variations is ended. Further, when the number of times of high probability variation becomes “0” (step A763; Y), the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step A764), and a signal related to the high probability end (for example, 2 jackpot signals are turned off). ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A765).
Then, a signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A766). In addition, there is a state of "high probability & time saving" and a state of "high probability & no time saving", and even during the special figure high probability, the general figure only changes the probability state, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and The normal electric accessory 1 open/extended state signal is always off.

Then, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step A767), save the universal figure low probability & no time saving flag in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A768), the special figure game mode flag area The special map low probability & no time saving flag is saved (step A769).
Next, a signal related to a left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A770), and a display LED during right-handed operation (for example, the first gaming state display portion 57) is displayed. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A771), and the high-probability variation number updating process is terminated.

FIG. 81(a) shows an example of a time saving state.
When the special figure variation display game result is a special result in a state without a time saving state (a state that is not a time saving state) and the special result is a special result that causes a time saving state, when the special game state based on the special result ends The time saving state (time saving state) starts (t51). As a result, the update of the number of high-probability fluctuations is started.
Before the number of executions of the special figure variation display game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) after the last special game state is finished, the result of the special figure variation display game becomes the special result, and the special result indicates the time saving state. In the case of a special result to be generated, the update of the high probability variation number is reset at the end of the special game state based on the special result, and the time saving state (time saving state) is extended (t52).
Then, when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the last special game state is reached reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), that is, when the high probability variation number becomes “0”, there is a time saving state (time saving. (State) ends (t53).

81(b) and FIG. 82 show an example of the processing relating to the second earned ball number notification effect.
81B, for example, the effect control device 300 starts a time-saving final fluctuation (that is, a special figure fluctuation display game for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the last special game state ends). Then, the variation effect corresponding to the final reduction in time saving is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the time saving final variation is displayed on the display device 41.
Next, the effect control device 300, when the variable effect is completed, notifies the total number of payouts in the time-saving state being generated (that is, the sum of the total payout numbers in each special game state in the time-saving state being generated). An effect for informing the number of acquired balls is performed (t61). As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 82(a), the final result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the time saving final variation is derived, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. A notification image G13 for notifying the total payout amount in the time saving state is displayed on the display device 41. Here, the "time saving state during occurrence" also includes a special game state (first hit) in a state that is not the time saving state.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs the second game state switching notification effect to notify the end of the time saving state when the second acquired payout number notification effect ends (t62). As a result, a predetermined notification image (for example, a sandstorm image) is displayed on the display device 41, as shown in FIG.
Next, the effect control device 300, when the second game state switching notification effect is finished, performs a variable effect corresponding to the next special figure variable display game (t63). As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 82D, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the next special figure variation display game is displayed on the display device 41.

Here, if the total payout amount is informed when the total payout amount is small, the player may feel uncomfortable and entertaining may decrease. In addition, if the total number of payouts has decreased due to a problem caused by someone other than the player, for example, a game ball could not be awarded to the special winning opening due to a problem with the gaming machine, the total payout number is notified. Then, the player's discomfort may be promoted. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the payout number notification effect is executed during the special game state to notify the total payout number, and at the end of the special game state, the first acquisition payout number notification effect is executed to execute the total payout number. After that, since the second acquisition payout number notification effect is executed to notify the total payout number at the end of the time saving state, the player's discomfort relapses due to the second acquisition payout number notification effect. There is a fear. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening during the time saving state (including the first win) is less than the second predetermined number (for example, one), the second winning ball number notification is given. It is assumed that the effect is not executed, that is, the notification image G13 for notifying the total payout amount in the time saving state that is occurring is not displayed on the display device 41.

Based on the information stored in the detection count storage area of the RAM 322, the effect control device 300 determines that the number of game balls that has won the special winning opening during the time saving state (including the first win) is the second predetermined number (for example, one). ) Is less than or equal to. Then, when it is determined that the number is not less than the second predetermined number, the total payout amount in the time saving state (including the total payout amount in the first win) is based on the information stored in the detection count storage area of the RAM 322. Is calculated to execute the second winning number information presentation effect (see FIG. 81(b)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number is less than the second predetermined number, the alternative production is executed in place of the second earned ball number notification production (see FIG. 81(c)).

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 81(c), a second game state switching notification effect is executed as an alternative effect. Specifically, if the effect control device 300 determines that the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening during the time saving state is not less than the second predetermined number, the second acquisition in the first period (t61 to t62). The payout number notification effect is executed, and the second game state switching notification effect is executed in the subsequent second period (t62 to t63). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of game balls that has won the special winning opening during the time saving state is less than the second predetermined number, an extension process for extending the execution time of the second game state switching notification effect is performed, and The second game state switching notification effect is executed not only in the two periods (t62 to t63) but also in the first period (t61 to t62). As a result, when the total payout number is small, the second acquired payout number notification effect is not executed, so that the player's discomfort can be reduced.

Moreover, the effect control device 300 calculates the total payout amount based on the information stored in the RAM 322, and notifies the calculated total payout amount by the second acquired payout number notification effect. Since the RAM 322 cannot hold the stored contents unless power is supplied, for example, when a power outage occurs during a time saving state, it may not be possible to accurately notify the total payout amount by the second acquired payout number notification effect. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, not only is the total payout number calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 322, but it is also determined whether or not to execute the second earned payout number notification effect. It is possible to reduce the execution probability of the second acquired payout number notification effect that cannot notify the total payout number.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 81(d) and 81(e), when the effect control device 300 determines that the number of game balls winning the special winning opening during the time saving state is not less than the second predetermined number, In the first period (t71 to t72), the second winning coin number notification effect is executed, and in the subsequent second period (t72 to t73), the second game state switching notification effect is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of game balls that has won the special winning opening during the time saving state is less than the second predetermined number, the second game state switching notification production as the alternative production in the first period (t71 to t72). It is also possible to execute the same effect and execute the second game state switching notification effect in the subsequent second period (t72 to t73). Even in the case of such a configuration, when the total payout number is small, the second acquired payout number notification effect is not executed, so that the player's discomfort can be reduced.

Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 81(f) and (g), when the effect control device 300 determines that the number of gaming balls won in the special winning opening during the time saving state is not less than the second predetermined number, In the first period (t61 to t62), the normal second earned ball number notification effect (the second earned ball number notification effect in the first effect mode) is executed, and then in the second period (t62 to t63). 2 The game state switching notification effect is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of game balls that has won the special winning opening during the time saving state is less than the second predetermined number, the second acquisition of the second effect mode as an alternative effect in the first period (t61 to t62). It is also possible to execute the payout number notification effect and execute the second game state switching notification effect during the subsequent second period (t62 to t63). In the second obtained payout number notification effect of the first effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 82(b), a predetermined character image G14 is added in addition to the notification image G13 for notifying the total payout amount in the time saving state that is occurring. Is displayed on the display device 41, whereas in the second obtained coin number informing effect of the second effect mode, as shown in, for example, FIG. 82(e), the total payout amount in the shortened state during occurrence is informed. The notification image G13 is displayed, but the predetermined character image G14 is not displayed. With this configuration, when the total payout amount is small, the display is different from the normal display, and a special feeling can be given to the player, so that the player's discomfort can be reduced.

81(b), (c) and 81(f), (g) are the specifications to execute the second game state switching notification effect at the end of the time saving state, and FIG. 81(d). , (E), the specification is such that the second game state switching notification effect is executed at the start of the variable display game immediately after the end of the time saving state, but the specification can be changed appropriately. That is, for example, in the specification of executing the second game state switching notification effect at the end of the time saving state, even if the same effect as the second game state switching notification effect is executed as the alternative effect in the first period (t61 to t62). good. Further, in the specification that the second game state switching notification effect is executed at the start of the variable display game immediately after the end of the time saving state, in the first period (t71 to t72), as the alternative effect, the second obtained number-of-winning-balls number notification in the second effect mode is notified. You may execute the performance.
In addition, the alternative production is not limited to the second game state switching notification production and the second production mode second production number notification production, and the second acquisition state production notification production and the second game state switching production production. It may be a different presentation.

In addition, in the example illustrated in FIGS. 81B to 81G, the alternative effect is executed in the entire first period (t61 to t62, t71 to 72), but the period in which the alternative effect is executed is the first period. It may be only part of the period.
In addition, the second obtained payout number notification effect may be executed not only at the end of the time saving state but also from the start to the end of the time saving state. In other words, as the second acquisition payout number notification effect, by continuously updating (adding) the total payout amount until the time saving state ends, an effect of notifying in real time the total payout amount in the time saving state that is occurring. You can go. Furthermore, if the second winning number informing notification effect is an effect for notifying in real time the total number of payouts in the time saving state that is occurring, the second predetermined number of game balls won in the special winning opening during the time saving state. The second acquired payout number notification effect may be started after the number becomes equal to or larger than the number.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a special result, the variation winning device (special variation winning device). In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which 38) is converted into a state in which a gaming ball is easy to win, a storage unit (RAM 322) that cannot store and store the stored information when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is stopped. ) And production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production of the game, and it is possible to generate a specific game state (time saving state) different from the special game state after the end of the special game state, and a storage means. Can store the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device or the number of paying playing balls according to the winning game ball to the variable winning device, and the production control means, at the end of the specific game state. In the specific game state stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute the notification effect (the second acquisition ball number notification effect in the first effect mode) that notifies the number of winnings or the number of payout game balls in the specific game state. If the number of winnings or the number of payout game balls is less than a predetermined number (second predetermined number), the alternative effect (the second game state switching notification effect or the second acquisition output of the second effect mode is performed without executing the notification effect. 81 (b), (c), 81 (d), (e) and 81 (f), (g) are executed.

Therefore, when the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device (in the present embodiment, the large winning opening in the present embodiment) in the specific game state is small, the obtained payout number notification effect (second of the first effect mode) Since the obtained number-of-balls informing effect is not executed, the player's discomfort can be reduced, and the interest in the obtained number-of-balls informing effect can be enhanced.
The variable winning device is not limited to the special winning port (special variable winning device 38) and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, the normal variable winning device 37 or the large winning port having a V switch.
Further, in the embodiment, the number of winnings (the number of times of detection by the special winning opening switch 38a) is stored in the storage means (RAM 322), but the number of payout game balls (the winning of the gaming balls into the big winning opening is stored in the storage means. It is also possible to store the payout amount based on
Further, in the embodiment, the number of payout game balls in the specific game state (total payout number in the time saving state) is notified by the notification effect (the second acquisition payout number notification effect in the first effect mode). Depending on the performance, the number of winnings in the specific game state (the number of winnings of the game ball to the big winning opening in the time saving state, or the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening in the time saving state and the general winning opening 35 in the time saving state) Sum of the number of winning game balls).
Further, the predetermined number (second predetermined number) is not limited to one and may be a plurality.

Further, of the number of prizes or payout game balls in the specific game state stored in the storage means, the number of prizes or payout game balls in a predetermined period in the specific game state is less than a predetermined number (second predetermined number). In some cases, the alternative production (the second game state switching notification production or the second production number notification production in the second production mode) is executed without executing the notification production (the second acquisition ball number notification production of the first production mode). ) May be executed. Specifically, for example, the specific game state is a first period (a period in which an immediate hit notification effect appears frequently without reaching), a second period (a period with the same effect frequency as usual), and a third period. (A period in which the number of remaining times in the time saving state is counted down, and the effect frequency of announcements is different from the first period and the second period (for example, lower than the first period and the second period)), and the fourth period (the end of the time saving state When the variable time before one rotation of is divided into four periods of a fixed value), when the number of winnings or the number of payout game balls in one of these four periods is less than a predetermined number, When the total number of prizes or the total number of payout game balls in a plurality of the four periods is less than the predetermined number, the alternative effect may be executed without executing the notification effect.

In addition, the first condition that the number of prizes or payout game balls in the specific game state is a predetermined number or more, and the number of prizes or payout game balls in each of the special game states in the specific game state is the specified number or more. When both of the second conditions that are “1” are satisfied, the notification effect (the second acquisition ball number notification effect of the first effect mode) is executed, and when at least one of the first condition and the second condition is not satisfied, , The alternative production (the second gaming state switching notification production and the second production-mode number notification production production in the second production mode) is executed without executing the notification production (the second acquisition production number notification production in the first production mode) It may be done.
Further, the display mode of the character image G14 may be changed according to the number of prizes or the number of payout game balls in the specific game state.
Further, not only when the number of winnings or the number of payout gaming balls in the specific game state is less than the predetermined number, but also when a predetermined error occurs, the obtained number-of-balls notification effect (the second acquisition/winning of the first effect mode) It is also possible to cancel the execution of the (ball number notification effect) and execute the alternative effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), the first period (t61 to t62) in which the notification effect (the second earned ball number notification effect in the first effect mode) is executed. , T71 to t72) and a second period (t62 to t63, t72 to t73), a game state switching notification effect (second game state switching notification effect) that notifies that the game state is switched can be executed, and the winning is achieved. Number (the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening during the time saving state (including the first win)) or the number of payout gaming balls (based on the winning of the game ball into the major winning opening during the time saving state (including the first win)) When the number of payouts is less than a predetermined number (second predetermined number), the gaming state switching notification effect can be executed as an alternative effect over the first period and the second period (Fig. 81 ( (b), (c) and FIGS. 81(d), (e)).
With this configuration, the game state switching notification effect (second game state switching notification effect) is extended (in the case of the examples shown in FIGS. 81(d) and 81(e), it seems to have been extended). Therefore, it is possible to cancel the execution of the acquired payout number notification effect (the second acquired payout number notification effect) without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a special result, the variable winning device (special variation winning device 38 ) Is displayed on the display device 41 at a predetermined timing (in the case of the present embodiment, a notification image G13 and a character image G14) on a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game ball is easily won. It is possible to generate a specific game state (time saving state) different from the special game state after the special game state is completed, by the display control unit (production control device 300), and the display control unit is a variable winning device in the specific game state. If the number of winning game balls to is not more than the predetermined number (second predetermined number), the predetermined image is not displayed (FIGS. 81(b), (c) or 81(d), (e) or 81 (f) and (g)). Specifically, in the examples shown in FIGS. 81(b), 81(c) and 81(d), 81(e), the display of the notification image G13 and the character image G14 is stopped, and the notification image G13 and the character image G14 are stopped. In the example shown in (g), the display of the character image G13 is stopped.

Therefore, if the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device in the specific game state does not reach the predetermined number (second predetermined number), the predetermined image is not displayed even at the predetermined timing, so the predetermined timing When it comes to, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game as compared with a game machine that only displays a predetermined image.
The predetermined image is not limited to the notification image G13 and the character image G14 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the manufacturer name, the model name, the number of consecutive games in the special game state, and the winning area (a big winning opening, a general winning opening, It may be a title image or the like showing a title according to the number of winnings (or the number of gaming balls paid out in accordance with the winnings in the winning area).

<Re-change production>
The gaming machine 10 can execute a pseudo continuous effect in which the decorative special symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle of the special figure variable display game and then re-variantly displayed again and again once or more.
For example, as shown in FIG. 83, the period from the start to the end of the special variable display game is the section before the reach state, that is, the first section in which the pre-reach effect is executed, and the reach state. It is divided into a second section, which is a section in which the N reach effect is executed, and a third section, which is a section after the reach state is executed and in which the SP reach effect is executed, which is a section afterward. can do. The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of executing the pseudo continuous production in which the re-variation production is performed in at least one of the first section, the second section, and the third section.

Here, "pre-reach effect" is, for example, before-reach variation mode (for example, left symbol (decoration special symbol in left variation display area), middle symbol (decoration special symbol in middle variation display area), and right symbol (right) This is an effect that is executed together with the variable display of the decorative special symbol in a mode in which all the decorative special symbols in the variable display region) change at high speed. Further, while the pre-reach effect is being executed, it is possible to execute various notice effects that are executed before the reach state is formed. That is, various notice effects that are executed before the reach state is formed are included in the pre-reach effect.
Further, the "N reach effect" is, for example, a reach variation mode (for example, among the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, the symbols forming the reach symbol are temporarily stopped, and the symbols not forming the reach symbol are changed at high speed. It is an effect that is executed together with the variable display of the decorative special symbol in the mode), and is an effect that performs a display or the like that suggests (or informs the confirmation) that N reach is in progress. Specifically, for example, an effect of displaying an image called "reach", an effect of displaying a type name of N reach, an effect image or character image corresponding to N reach (including an image suggesting a jackpot expectation degree) is displayed. It is the production etc.
Further, the "SP reach effect" is, for example, an effect executed together with the variable display of the decorative special symbol in the reach variation mode, and a display or the like indicating that SP reach is being performed (or a confirmation notification). It is a performance to be performed. Specifically, for example, it is an effect that displays the type name of SP reach, an effect image that corresponds to SP reach, and an effect that displays a character image (including an image that indicates the jackpot expectation).

The effect control device 300 performs, for example, a pseudo continuous effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute a pseudo continuous effect during the special figure variable display game at the start of the special figure variable display game. In this pseudo continuous production lottery, it is also determined in which of the first section, the second section and the third section the re-varying production is performed. Hereinafter, the re-fluctuation effect performed in the first section is referred to as "re-variation effect A", the re-variation effect performed in the second section is referred to as "re-fluctuation effect B", and the re-fluctuation effect performed in the third section is referred to as "re-fluctuation effect C". .. That is, in the pseudo continuous effect lottery, whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous effect is determined, and when executing the pseudo continuous effect, whether or not to execute the re-variation effect A (execute the re-variation effect A. If the re-variation effect B is performed, whether or not the re-fluctuation effect B is executed (when the re-variation effect B is performed, the effect mode is also), and whether or not the re-variation effect C is executed ( When the re-variation effect C is executed, the effect mode is also determined).

In addition, even when it is determined that the re-variation effect is performed in one section among the first section, the second section, and the third section (that is, any one of the re-variation effects A to C is performed). There is a case where it is decided to perform re-fluctuation effect in the second section (that is, to perform any two of re-variation effects A to C), and to perform re-variation effect in all sections. (That is, all of the re-variation effects A to C are performed) may be determined.
In addition, a plurality of types of tables in which which section the re-fluctuation effect is to be executed and the type (representation mode) of the re-variation effect to be executed in each section are set in advance are stored, and which table is referred to. Whether to carry out may be determined by, for example, a pseudo-relationship production lottery.

In the re-variation effect, the possibility of deriving the special result mode (big hit expectation degree) varies depending on the timing (section) at which the re-variation effect is performed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree increases in the order of re-variation effect A<re-fluctuation effect B<re-fluctuation effect C, and the jackpot expectation degree of re-variation effect C is 100%. That is, the re-variation effect can be executed in the third section only when the result of the target special figure variation display game is the special result (big hit result).

The first section starts with the start of the special map variation display game. When the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 starts the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, and first executes the pre-reach effect.
When the pseudo continuous production lottery targeting the special figure variation display game is won and it is determined in the pseudo sequential production lottery that the re-variation production is performed in the first section, the production control device 300. 83, for example, as shown in FIG. 83, a predetermined timing in the first section (for example, a timing immediately after the start of fluctuation (before becoming a high-speed fluctuation), a timing immediately after a high-speed fluctuation, one of the left symbol and the right symbol. Is temporarily stopped, the left symbol and the right symbol are both temporarily stopped), and the re-variation effect A is performed. In the re-variation effect A, a temporary stop display of the decoration special symbol is performed in the temporary stop pattern 1, and thereafter, the decoration special symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed is changed again and the pre-reach effect is performed. Then, after the pre-reach effect is executed in the re-variation effect A, if a reach state occurs in the special figure variation display game, the process moves to the N reach effect (second section), and the reach is performed in the special figure variation display game. If the state does not occur, the special figure variation display game ends. After execution of the pre-reach effect in the re-varying effect A, the SP reach effect (third section) may be moved to without the N-reach effect (second section).

FIG. 84 shows an example of the re-variation effect A.
When the special figure variation display game starts, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is started, and pre-reach effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 84(a).
Next, at the start timing of the re-variation effect A, for example, as shown in FIG. 84(b), a temporary stop display of the decorative special symbol is performed in the temporary stop pattern 1, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 84(c). In addition, the decorative special symbol is re-variably displayed and the pre-reach effect is performed.
Temporary stop pattern 1 is a pattern that temporarily stops in a disengagement result mode that does not include a reach symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 84(b), different decorative special symbols are provided in the left, middle, and right variable display areas. It is a pattern of temporary stop.

The temporary stop pattern 1 may be a pattern including a temporary stop special symbol G1 as shown in FIG. 84(d), for example. Here, the temporary stop dedicated symbol G21 is a symbol that is not used as a decorative special symbol that constitutes the final result mode of the decorative special symbol variable display game. The temporary stop special symbol G21 may be a pseudo continuous symbol such as “pseudo” or “pseudo continuous” (decorative special symbol for notifying that it is a pseudo continuous), or a developed pattern such as “development” (more. It may be a decorative special pattern for notifying the development to reach with high expectation) or a predetermined character image.
Further, the temporary stop pattern 1 is not a pattern for temporarily stopping all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 84(e), temporarily suspends the left symbol, the middle symbol, and a part of the right symbol. The pattern may be such that it is stopped and the rest is displayed in a variable manner (low-speed variation) at a speed at which it can be identified. The "low-speed fluctuation" referred to here may be a fluctuation that is slower than the fluctuation in the small symbol fluctuation display section 41d, or may be a high-speed fluctuation in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display section 41a (immediately after the start of a section or The fluctuation may be slower than the fluctuation immediately before the temporary stop).

On the other hand, when it is not decided to perform the re-variation effect in the first section in the pseudo continuous effect lottery targeting the special figure variable display game (the pseudo random effect lottery targeting the special figure variable display game is lost. (Including the case of doing), the first section ends without the re-variation effect being performed in the first section. After the first section ends, if a reach state occurs in the special map variation display game, the process moves to N reach production (second section) or SP reach production (third section), and in the special figure variation display game. If the reach state does not occur, the special figure variation display game ends. When the special figure variation display game ends, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit result, it shifts to a special game state, and if the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit result, When the small hitting game state is entered and the result of the special figure changing display game is a failure result, the next special figure changing display game (that is, the first section) is started.

When shifting to the second section, the effect control device 300 executes the N reach effect.
When the pseudo continuous production lottery targeting the special figure variation display game is won, and when it is determined to perform the revariation production in the second section in the pseudo continuous production lottery, the production control device 300. 83, for example, as shown in FIG. 83, a predetermined timing in the second section (for example, a timing immediately after the start of the N reach effect, a timing just before the end of the N reach effect (specifically, an effect corresponding to the deviation is generated. (Before or after the execution), when the N reach effect ends and the screen returns to the normal screen (specifically, the background image at the time of the reach is displayed, etc.) The variation effect B is performed. In the re-variation effect B, the temporary decoration display of the decoration special symbol is performed in the temporary stop pattern 2, and thereafter, the decoration special symbol temporarily displayed is changed again and the pre-reach effect and the N reach effect are performed. After execution of the N reach effect in the re-variation effect B, when the special map variation display game develops to SP reach, the SP reach effect (third section) is moved to, and the SP is generated in the special figure variation display game. If the reach is not developed, the special figure variation display game ends.

FIG. 85 shows an example of the re-variation effect B.
When shifting to the second section, the N reach effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 85(a).
Next, at the start timing of the re-variation effect B, for example, as shown in FIG. 85(b), a temporary stop display of the decorative special symbol is performed in the temporary stop pattern 2, and thereafter, for example, FIG. 85(c), (d). ), the decorative special symbol is re-variably displayed and the pre-reach effect and the N reach effect are performed.
The temporary stop pattern 2 is a pattern in which temporary stop is performed in an outlier result mode including a reach pattern, and for example, as shown in FIG. 85(b), it is the same in two variable display areas of the left, middle, and right variable display areas. The decorative special symbol is temporarily stopped to form a reach symbol, and the special symbol G21 for temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the remaining variable display area.

The temporary stop pattern 2 may be a pattern that does not include the temporary stop dedicated symbol G21 as shown in FIG. 85(e), for example.
Further, the temporary stop pattern 2 is not a pattern for temporarily stopping all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 85(f), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and a part of the right symbol are temporarily suspended. The pattern may be such that it is stopped and the rest is displayed in a variable manner (low-speed variation) at a speed at which it can be identified. The "low-speed fluctuation" referred to here may be a fluctuation that is slower than the fluctuation in the small symbol fluctuation display section 41d, or may be a high-speed fluctuation in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display section 41a (immediately after the start of a section or The fluctuation may be slower than the fluctuation immediately before the temporary stop).
Further, in the re-variation effect B, at least N reach effect may be executed. That is, in the re-variation effect B, the pre-reach effect is omitted, and only the symbols other than the reach symbol (the middle symbol in the example shown in FIG. 85) are re-variably displayed from the temporary stop state to perform the N-reach effect. May be.

On the other hand, when it is not decided to perform the re-variation effect in the second section in the pseudo continuous effect lottery targeting the special figure variable display game (the pseudo continuous effect lottery targeting the special figure variable display game is lost. (Including the case of doing), the second section ends without the re-variation effect being performed in the second section. When the second section ends, if the special map variation display game develops to SP reach, the process moves to the third section, and if the special figure variation display game does not develop to SP reach, the special figure variation display game. Ends.

When shifting to the third section, the effect control device 300 executes the SP reach effect.
When the pseudo continuous production lottery targeting the special figure variation display game is won and it is determined that the re-variable production is performed in the third section in the pseudo continuous production lottery, the production control device 300. 83, for example, as shown in FIG. 83, a predetermined timing in the third section (for example, a timing immediately after the start of the SP reach effect, a timing just before the end of the SP reach effect (specifically, Before or after the execution), when the SP reach effect ends and returns to the normal screen (specifically, when the background image at the time of the reach is displayed), SP reach effect The re-variation effect C is performed at the timing of performing the chance-up effect (such as the effect of changing the character color or the effect of cut-in). In the re-variation effect C, the decoration special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the temporary stop pattern 3, and thereafter, the decoration special symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed is again changed and the SP reach effect is performed. In the present embodiment, since the re-variation effect C can be executed only when the result of the special figure variation display game is the big hit result, the special figure variation display game is executed through the SP reach effect in the re-variation effect C. Upon completion, the special game state is entered.

FIG. 86 shows an example of the re-variation effect C.
When shifting to the third section, the SP reach effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(a).
Next, at the start timing of the re-variation effect C, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(b), a temporary stop display of the decorative special symbol is performed in the temporary stop pattern 3, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(c). In addition, the decorative special symbol is re-variably displayed and the SP reach effect is performed. Then, when the re-fluctuation effect C ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(d), a jackpot result mode (special result mode) is derived as a result mode (final result mode) of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game, and thereafter, , Shift to the special game state.

The temporary stop pattern 3 is a pattern of temporary stop in a result mode including the reach pattern (may be the outlier result mode or the big hit result mode), for example, as shown in FIG. The middle decorative right special pattern is temporarily stopped in the two variable display areas of the right and left variable display areas to form a reach pattern, while the other variable special areas are displayed in the remaining variable display areas (only for temporary stop) The pattern G21 is excluded) or a pattern of temporary stop in the big hit result mode as shown in FIG. 86(e), for example.

If the temporary stop pattern 3 is a pattern that temporarily stops in the big hit result mode (see FIG. 86(e)), the SP reach effect in the re-fluctuation effect C may be omitted. That is, the temporary stop state may be changed to the stop state as it is, and the jackpot result mode may be derived as the result mode (final result mode) of the decorative special figure variation display game. When the SP reach effect in the re-fluctuation effect C is omitted, after the temporary stop display of the decorative special symbol is performed in the temporary stop pattern 3, the re-variation effect D (for example, the symbol You may perform promotion production and re-lottery production).
Further, the temporary stop pattern 3 is not a pattern for temporarily stopping all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(f), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and a part of the right symbol are temporarily suspended. The pattern may be such that it is stopped and the rest is displayed in a variable manner (low-speed variation) at a speed at which it can be identified. The "low-speed fluctuation" referred to here may be a fluctuation that is slower than the fluctuation in the small symbol fluctuation display section 41d, or may be a high-speed fluctuation in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display section 41a (immediately after the start of a section or The fluctuation may be slower than the fluctuation immediately before the temporary stop).
Further, in the re-variation effect C, at least the SP reach effect may be executed. That is, in the re-variation effect C, pre-reach effect and N reach effect may be performed in addition to the SP reach effect. In that case, the variation time of the special figure variation display game may be too long. Therefore, it is desirable that the variation time be shorter than the production time of each effect that was executed before the re-variation effect C was executed.

On the other hand, when it is not decided to perform the re-variation effect in the third section in the pseudo continuous effect lottery targeting the special figure variable display game (the pseudo continuous effect lottery targeting the special figure variable display game is lost. (Including the case of doing), the special figure variation display game ends without the re-variation effect being performed in the third section, and the third section ends with the end of the special figure variation display game.

In this way, in the re-variation effect A executed in the first section, the same variation display and effect as in the first section (variation display and pre-reach effect in pre-reach variation mode) are performed. Further, in the re-variation effect B executed in the second section, the same variation display and effect (variation display in the reach variation mode and N reach effect) as in the second section are performed, and the re-variation effect performed in the third section. In effect C, the same variable display and effect (variable display in the reach change mode and SP reach effect) as in the third section are performed. That is, it is configured to perform a variable display and an effect having the same degree of expectation as (or more than) the variable display and the effect that were executed at the start of the re-fluent effect (immediately before the re-variable effect occurs). ..
For example, when the re-variation effect is executed in the second section, in the re-variation effect, the variation display and the effect having the same degree of expectation (or more) as the variation display and the effect in the second section are not performed. In addition, only the variation display and the effect (for example, reach-less effect) having a lower degree of expectation than the variation display and the effect in the second section are performed, and thereafter, the special figure variation display game is executed without shifting to the third section. When the game is over, the player may receive a downgrade feeling that he/she shifts to an unfavorable state even though the re-variation effect has occurred. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by performing the variable display and the effect having the same degree of expectation as (or more than) the variable display and the effect that were being executed at the time of the start of the re-variable effect, the player can perform the re-variable effect. It avoids giving a feeling of downgrade. That is, the re-variation effect of the present embodiment is an effect that does not give the player a feeling of downgrade.

As described above, SP reach includes SP1 reach, SP2 reach, SP3 reach, and Premier reach, and the expected value (big hit expectation) increases in the order of SP1 reach <SP2 reach <SP3 reach <Premier reach. .. From the viewpoint of not giving the player a feeling of downgrading due to the re-variation effect, the re-variation effect C is the same as the SP reach effect executed at the start of the re-variation effect C (immediately before the re-variation effect C occurs). Alternatively, it is preferable to execute an SP reach effect having an expectation level higher than that. That is, if the SP reach effect in the SP3 reach mode is being executed at the start of the re-fluctuation effect C, the SP reach effect in the SP3 reach mode or the SP reach effect in the premier reach mode is performed as the re-variation effect C. Is preferred.

Further, when the gaming machine 10 derives the final result mode in which the probability variation symbols are aligned in the decorative special figure variation display game, the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (probability variation) after the special gaming state ends. State), and when the final result mode in which non-probability variation symbols (normal symbols) are gathered is derived, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a low probability state (normal probability state) after the special game state ends. In the case of a machine, from the viewpoint of not giving the player a feeling of downgrade due to the re-variation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 85(a), at the start of the re-variation effect B (immediately before the re-variation effect B occurs). In the case where the reach symbol is configured with a probability variation symbol (for example, an odd number symbol) in the N reach effect that has been executed in FIG. 85, for example, as shown in FIG. 85D, the re-variation display in the re-variation effect B (N It is preferable that the reach symbol in the reach effect) is not composed of a non-probable variation symbol (for example, an even symbol). The same applies to the re-variation effect C.

Here, the advance notice effect can be executed during the pre-reach effect is being executed. In the present embodiment, as the notice effect performed during the execution of the pre-reach effect, as a result of the special figure variation display game being executed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 84(a), 84(c), and 85(c). Performs a notice character effect that displays a notice character image G22 that indicates an expectation degree (a big hit expectation degree) that is a special result. The pre-reach effect is performed in the first section (when the re-variation effect A is executed, the period before the re-variation effect A is executed in the first section), the re-variation effect A, and the re-variation effect B. Therefore, the notice character effect can be executed in each of the first section, the re-changing effect A, and the re-changing effect B.
In the case of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 87(a), there are five types of the preview character image G22, but the types of the preview character image G22 are not limited to five types, and may be multiple types.

The effect control device 300, for example, at the start of the special figure variation display game, the first section of the special figure variation display game (when the re-variation effect A is executed, the re-variation effect A is executed in the first section. During the period (before being performed), a first notice effect lottery for determining whether to execute the notice character effect is performed. When the first notice effect lottery is won, the reach system of the special figure variation display game is acquired based on the result information (variation system command and symbol system command) from the game control device 100. After that, referring to the notice character production distribution table for the first section, the presentation mode of the notice character production executed during the first section is determined based on the acquired reach system.

FIG. 87(b) shows an example of a notice character effect distribution table for the first section.
In the notice character effect, the notice character effect of the first effect mode in which the first notice character appears as the notice character image G22, and the second notice character having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first notice character appears in the notice character image G22. The notice character effect in the second effect mode, the notice character image in the third effect mode in which the third notice character having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first and second notice characters appears as the notice character image G22, and the notice character image As the G22, the notice character effect of the fourth effect mode in which the fourth notice character having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first to third notice characters appears, and as the notice character image G22, the jackpot expectation degree than the first to fourth notice characters There is a fifth notice aspect of the notice character that appears. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 87(b), the notice character effects of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are executed during the first section, but the fourth effect mode and the fifth effect. The notice character production of the aspect is not executed.
87(b), 88(a), and 88(b), "no reach" of the reach system corresponds to the case where the second system does not move to the second system after the end of the first system. "N reach" corresponds to the case where the third section is not shifted to after the end of the second section, and "SP reach" of the reach system corresponds to the case of shifting to the third section after the end of the second section.

In addition, when it is determined that the re-variation effect is performed in the first section in the pseudo consecutive effect lottery targeting the special figure variable display game, that is, in the pseudo consecutive effect lottery targeting the special figure variable display game, When it is determined that the variation effect A is performed, the second notice effect lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the notice character effect during the re-variation effect A is performed. When the second notice production lottery is won, the reach system of the special figure variation display game is acquired based on the result information (variation system command and symbol system command) from the game control device 100. After that, referring to the notice character effect distribution table for the re-changing effect A, the effect mode of the notice character effect to be executed during the re-changing effect A is determined based on the acquired reach system and the previous notice character.

FIG. 88(a) shows an example of the notice character effect distribution table for re-variation effect A.
Not only the reach system of the special map change display game, but also the previous notice character, that is, the notice character of the previous notice (the notice character effect to be executed during the first section ) The production mode is also taken into consideration. The previous notice character “none” in FIG. 88(a) indicates that the notice character is not executed in the first notice effect lottery, that is, the notice character effect is not executed during the first section.
For example, as shown in FIG. 88(a), if the previous notice character is the "second notice character", that is, if the presentation mode of the previous notice character effect is the second effect mode, The first effect mode having lower expectation than the effect mode is not selected, and when the previous notice character is the “third notice character”, that is, the effect mode of the last notice character effect is the third effect. In the case of the aspect, the first effect aspect and the second effect aspect having lower expectations than the third effect aspect are not selected. That is, the notice character effect having an expectation level equal to or higher than the previous notice character effect is executed. This avoids giving the player a feeling of downgrade due to the re-variation effect.

In addition, when it is determined that the re-variation effect is performed in the second section in the pseudo consecutive effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game, that is, in the pseudo consecutive effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game, When it is determined that the variation effect B is performed, the third notice effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the notice character effect during the re-variation effect B is performed. When the third notice production lottery is won, the reach system of the special figure variation display game is acquired based on the result information (variation system command and symbol system command) from the game control device 100. After that, referring to the notice character effect distribution table for the re-changing effect B, the effect mode of the notice character effect to be executed during the re-changing effect B is determined based on the acquired reach system and the previous notice character.

FIG. 88(b) shows an example of a notice character effect distribution table for re-variation effect B.
Not only the reach system of the special map variation display game, but also the previous notice character, that is, the notice character of the previous notice effect (when the second notice effect lottery is won) In consideration of the production mode of the notice character production executed during the re-variation production A, and the notice character production executed during the first section if the player wins the first notice production lottery and loses the second notice production lottery) It is determined. The previous notice character “None” in FIG. 88(b) indicates that the notice character has not been selected for both the first notice effect lottery and the second notice effect lottery, that is, the notice character for both the first section and the re-changing effect A. This is the case where the effect is not executed.
For example, as shown in FIG. 88(b), the notice character effect distribution table for re-variation effect B is equal to or more than the previous notice character effect distribution table similarly to the notice character effect distribution table for re-variation effect A. The notice character production having the expectation level is executed. This prevents the player from feeling downgraded due to the re-variation effect.

Further, the notice effect can be executed during the execution of the N reach effect or the SP reach effect. Similar to the notice effect that can be executed while the pre-reach effect is being executed (for example, the notice character effect), the notice effect that can be executed while the N-reach effect is being executed or the SP reach effect is the same as or the same as the previous notice effect. The notice effect having the above expectations is executed. This avoids giving the player a feeling of downgrade due to the re-variation effect.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed in a plurality of variable display areas based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is executed, In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state when the stop result of the game becomes a special result, at least a part of the plurality of variable display areas after temporary stop display of identification information in the plurality of variable display areas is performed. It is possible to execute re-variation effects (re-variation effects A to C) in which the identification information is re-variably displayed, and during the period from the start to the end of the game, the pre-reach variation display (reach reach before the reach state is formed The first section, which is the section in which the variation display of the decorative special symbol in the previous variation mode is performed, and the section after the reach state is formed, which is the section in which the first effect (N reach effect) is performed. It can be formed by two sections and a third section which is a section after the reach state is formed and a second effect (SP reach effect) different from the first effect is performed (FIG. 83). In the re-variation effect executed in the first section, the temporary stop display of the identification information is performed in the first temporary stop mode (temporary stop pattern 1) (see FIGS. 84(b) and (d)), and the second In the re-variation effect executed in the section, the temporary stop display of the identification information is performed in the second temporary stop mode (temporary stop pattern 2) different from the first temporary stop mode (see FIGS. 85(b) and (e)). In the re-variation effect executed in the third section, the temporary stop display of the identification information is performed in the third temporary stop mode (temporary stop pattern 3) different from the first temporary stop mode and the second temporary stop mode (FIG. 86). (See (b) and (e)).
That is, the temporary stop mode (temporary stop pattern) differs depending on the section in which the re-fluctuation effect is executed. Therefore, a plurality of types of re-variation effects having different temporary stop modes can be executed, and the current section can be suggested by the temporary stop mode in the re-variation effects, so that the interest of the re-variation effects can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the re-variation effect is executed in the first section, the pre-reach variation display (variation display of the decorative special symbol in the pre-reach variation mode) is performed, and thereafter, The game (decorative special figure variation display game) may be configured to end without moving to the second section or to move to the second section (see FIG. 83).
With this configuration, it is possible to perform the same variation display (variation display before reach) as the variation display that was being executed at the start of the re-variation effect, and give the player a downgrade feeling by the re-variation effect. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to enhance the interest of re-changing production.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the re-variation effect is executed in the second section, the first effect (N reach effect) is performed, and thereafter, the operation moves to the third section, or The game (decorative special figure variation display game) can be configured to end without shifting to the third section (see FIG. 83).
With this configuration, it is possible to perform the same effect (first effect (N reach effect)) as the effect that was being executed at the start of the re-changing effect, and give the player a feeling of downgrade by the re-changing effect. Since it does not happen, it is possible to enhance the interest of re-changing production.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the re-variation effect is executed in the third section, the result of the game (decorative special figure variation display game) can be configured to be a special result (FIG. 83).
With such a configuration, since the re-variation effect executed in the third section has a high expectation, it is possible to enhance the interest of the re-variation effect.
In addition, even when the result of the target special figure variation display game is a failure result, the re-variation effect may be executable in the third section. That is, the degree of expectation of the big hit of the re-fluctuation effect C may not be 100%.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first temporary stop mode (temporary stop pattern 1) does not include the identification information (reach pattern) forming the reach state (see FIGS. 84(b) and (d)). ), the second temporary stop mode (temporary stop pattern 2) is special identification information (temporary stop) that is not derived from the stop information of the identification information (reach symbol) forming the reach state and the game (decorative special figure variation display game). It is a mode (see FIG. 85(b)) that includes a special symbol G21), and the third temporary stop mode (temporary stop pattern 3) includes identification information (reach pattern) that forms a reach state, but special identification information. The temporary stop dedicated symbol G21) can be configured so as not to include it (see FIGS. 86B and 86E).
With this configuration, the difference between the first temporary stop mode, the second temporary stop mode, and the third temporary stop mode becomes clear, so that the interest of the re-variation effect can be increased.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (decorative special figure variation display game) in which a plurality of pieces of identification information (decorative special symbol) are changed is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the result of the game is special. In the gaming machine that can generate the special game state when the result is obtained, the period from the start to the end of the game can be configured by a plurality of sections (for example, first to third sections) (see FIG. 83). ), in each of a plurality of sections, a re-fluctuation effect (for example, re-variation effects A to C) that re-fluctates after temporarily stopping a part of the plurality of identification information can be executed, and the re-fluctuation effect is executed. In one section, the variation mode of the identification information (for example, the middle symbol) that does not temporarily stop when the re-variation effect is executed is different from the variation mode of the identification information immediately after the one section (FIG. 84(e. ), FIG. 85(f), and FIG. 86(f)). Specifically, the variation mode of the identification information that does not temporarily stop when the re-variation effect is executed is, for example, a mode in which the identification information varies at a low speed, and the variation mode of the identification information immediately after becoming one section is, For example, it is a mode in which the identification information is changed at high speed.
That is, the variation mode of the identification information that does not temporarily stop when the re-variation effect is executed is different from the variation mode of the identification information before the re-variation effect is executed. Therefore, the variation mode of the identification information that is not temporarily stopped during the temporary stop in the re-variation effect is different from the variation mode of the identification information before the re-variation effect, so that the interest of the re-variation effect can be enhanced.
Note that the plurality of sections included in the period from the start to the end of the game are not limited to the three sections of the first to third sections, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the re-variation display of the decoration special symbol executed in the re-variation effect is temporarily stopped after the decoration special symbol is in a predetermined result mode (for example, a result mode other than the special result mode) in the middle of the special symbol fluctuation display game. It is not limited to performing the re-variation display that changes again and again, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the re-variation display of the decoration special symbol executed in the re-variation effect is performed again after temporarily suspending the decoration special symbol in a predetermined result mode (for example, a special result mode) in the middle of the special symbol fluctuation display game. It may be a re-lottery effect that changes and stops to derive the final result mode.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines using the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

Further, it should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

10 Amusement machine 38 Special variable prize device (variable prize device)
300 production control device (production control means, display control means)
322 RAM (storage means)
G11, G12, G13, G14 Notification image (predetermined image)
G21 Temporary stop only design (special identification information)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a game that changes a plurality of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and can generate a special game state when the result of the game is a special result,
The period from the start to the end of the game is
A first section which is a section before the reach state is formed,
A second section which is a section after the reach state is formed,
And a third section which is a section after the reach state is formed and which is a section after the second section ,
In each of the first section and the second section , it is possible to execute a re-fluctuation effect that re-fluctates after temporarily suspending a part of the plurality of identification information,
Between districts where the re-variation effect of the first section and the second section is Ru is executed, the variation mode of the provisional stop and not the identification information when re-variation effect is executed, became among those compartment Unlike the variation of identification information immediately after,
In the third section, it is possible to execute a re-fluctuation effect that re-fluctates after temporarily stopping all of the plurality of pieces of identification information,
Before and after the temporary stop in the first section, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the special result,
The expectation degree suggested by the suggestive effect performed after the provisional stop is equal to the expectation degree suggested by the suggestive effect performed before the provisional stop or the suggestion effect suggested by the suggestion effect performed before the provisional stop A gaming machine characterized by higher than expectations.

Images